Mathtype for Windows

Home , Delete key, Esc key, MathType, Thin space, TrueType

MathType for Windows

Table of Contents 1. Welcome to MathType 6.9 ...... 7 2. New Features in MathType 6.9 ...... 8 3. Comparing MathType, Equation Editor, and MathType Lite Mode ...... 9 3.1 Equation Editor, Evaluating MathType, and Lite Mode ...... 9 3.2 MathType Features Not Available in Lite Mode ...... 10 3.3 Purchasing a Product Key and Unlocking MathType ...... 10 3.4 Collaborating with Equation Editor Users ...... 11 4. Getting Started ...... 13 4.1 MathType Installation ...... 13 4.1.1 Installing MathType ...... 13 4.1.2 Installing Unlocked or in Evaluation Mode ...... 13 4.1.3 MathType Setup Dialog...... 14 4.1.4 Installing over an older version ...... 15 4.1.5 Removing the application ...... 15 4.1.6 Moving MathType to a different folder ...... 15 4.1.7 Using Equation Conversion Manager ...... 16 4.1.8 Checking For the Latest Version ...... 17 4.2 Basic Tutorials ...... 17 4.2.1 Before You Start ...... 17 4.2.2 Fractions and Square Roots ...... 18 4.2.3 Sums, Subscripts & Superscripts ...... 21 4.2.4 Editing Old Equations ...... 25 4.2.5 What To Do Next ...... 27 4.3 More Tutorials ...... 27 4.3.1 Fonts and Styles ...... 27 4.3.2 Including Text in an Equation ...... 31 4.3.3 Using MathType's Toolbar ...... 33 4.3.4 Spacing and Alignment ...... 37 4.3.5 A Simple Matrix ...... 41 4.3.6 Equation Numbering in Microsoft Word ...... 43 4.3.7 Advanced Equation Numbering in Microsoft Word ...... 47 4.3.8 Setting Up a Microsoft Word 2007-2013 Document ...... 49 4.3.9 Setting Up a Microsoft Word 2002-2003 Document ...... 52 4.3.10 Formatting with Tabs ...... 54 4.3.11 Inserting Unusual Symbols ...... 57 4.3.12 Creating Web Pages with Microsoft Word ...... 60 4.3.13 Creating Web Pages with GIF Files ...... 62 4.3.14 Customizing the Keyboard ...... 64 4.3.15 Working with TeX, LaTeX, & MathML...... 66 4.3.16 Exporting Equations in Microsoft Word ...... 70 4.3.17 Simplifying Rational Expressions by Dividing Common Factors ...... 71

1 MathType for Windows

4.3.18 What To Do Next ...... 73 5. Using MathType ...... 74 5.1 Working with the Toolbar ...... 74 5.1.1 Adding Expressions to the Bars ...... 74 5.1.2 Editing Expressions in the Bars ...... 75 5.1.3 Editing the Status Bar Description for Expression Bar Items ...... 75 5.1.4 Removing Items from the Bars ...... 75 5.1.5 Adding Symbols and Templates from the Palettes to the Expression Bars ...... 76 5.1.6 Adding Symbols from the Insert Symbol Dialog to the Expression Bars ...... 76 5.2 Working with the Keyboard ...... 77 5.2.1 Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts ...... 77 5.2.2 Adding a Keyboard Shortcut for an Expression ...... 78 5.2.3 One-shot style shortcuts ...... 78 5.2.4 Using TeX Language Input ...... 79 5.3 Working with the Windows 7 Math Input Panel ...... 80 5.4 Working with Files ...... 81 5.4.1 EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) ...... 81 5.4.2 GIF (Graphics Interchange Format) ...... 81 5.4.3 WMF (Windows Metafile) ...... 81 5.4.4 TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) ...... 82 5.5 Working with Insert Symbol ...... 82 5.5.1 Inserting a specific character or symbol ...... 82 5.5.2 Finding a Symbol by Matching Words in its Description ...... 82 5.6 Using Fonts ...... 83 5.6.1 Styles ...... 83 5.6.2 Blackboard bold (double-stroked) ...... 83 5.6.3 Fraktur (Old German)...... 84 5.6.4 Tiger Fonts: Support for Braille Math ...... 84 5.6.5 Letting Other People View and Print your Documents ...... 84 5.6.6 Adding to MathType's Font and Character Knowledge ...... 86 5.7 Other Topics ...... 86 5.7.1 Drag & Drop ...... 86 5.7.2 Replacing one Template with Another ...... 87 5.7.3 Ruler...... 87 5.7.4 Status Bar ...... 88 5.7.5 Checking For the Latest Version ...... 89 5.7.6 OLE's Insert Object Command ...... 90 5.7.7 Pasting tables and spreadsheet cells ...... 90 6. MathType with Microsoft Office ...... 92 6.1 Office 2007-2013 ...... 92 6.1.1 Microsoft Excel -- pasting a range of cells into MathType ...... 92 6.1.2 MathType's Support for Microsoft Word ...... 92 6.1.3 MathType's Support for Microsoft PowerPoint ...... 125 6.2 Office 2002-2003 ...... 127

2 MathType for Windows

6.2.1 Microsoft Excel -- pasting a range of cells into MathType ...... 127 6.2.2 MathType's Support for Microsoft Word ...... 128 6.2.3 MathType's Support for Microsoft PowerPoint ...... 158 7. Using MathType with Applications and Websites ...... 161 7.1 Math Everywhere and Anywhere ...... 161 7.2 General Techniques ...... 162 7.2.1 Working With Insert Object ...... 162 7.2.2 Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog ...... 163 7.2.3 Working With MathML ...... 164 7.2.4 Working With TeX ...... 165 7.2.5 Translation Issues ...... 166 7.2.6 Creating a New Translator ...... 167 7.2.7 Working With Equation Image Files ...... 167 7.2.8 Working With Web Pages ...... 167 8. MathType Reference ...... 170 8.1 MathType's command line options ...... 170 8.2 Windows Start Menu ...... 171 8.3 Menus ...... 171 8.3.1 File menu ...... 171 8.3.2 Edit menu ...... 173 8.3.3 View menu ...... 174 8.3.4 Zoom Sub-menu ...... 176 8.3.5 Format menu ...... 176 8.3.6 Color Sub-menu ...... 178 8.3.7 Matrix Sub-menu ...... 178 8.3.8 Style menu ...... 179 8.3.9 Size menu ...... 180 8.3.10 Preferences Menu ...... 181 8.3.11 Equation Preferences Sub-menu ...... 182 8.3.12 Help menu ...... 183 8.3.13 MathType on the Web sub-menu ...... 184 8.4 Dialogs ...... 184 8.4.1 Custom Speech Text Dialog ...... 185 8.4.2 Customize Keyboard Dialog ...... 186 8.4.3 Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog ...... 187 8.4.4 Define Sizes Dialog ...... 189 8.4.5 Define Spacing Dialog ...... 189 8.4.6 Define Styles Dialog ...... 190 8.4.7 Edit / New Color Dialog ...... 192 8.4.8 Edit Color Menu Dialog ...... 193 8.4.9 Using Equation Conversion Manager ...... 194 8.4.10 Expression Properties Dialog ...... 195 8.4.11 Fence Alignment Dialog ...... 195 8.4.12 Functions Recognized Dialog ...... 196

3 MathType for Windows

8.4.13 Insert Symbol Dialog ...... 196 8.4.14 Insert Symbol Search Dialog ...... 199 8.4.15 Line Spacing Dialog ...... 200 8.4.16 Load Equation Preferences Dialog ...... 200 8.4.17 Load Equation Preferences from Factory Settings Dialog ...... 201 8.4.18 Load Equation Preferences from File Dialog ...... 201 8.4.19 Matrix Dialog ...... 201 8.4.20 Object Editing Preferences Dialog ...... 202 8.4.21 Other Size Dialog ...... 203 8.4.22 Other Style Dialog ...... 203 8.4.23 Ruler Units Dialog ...... 203 8.4.24 Save As Dialog ...... 203 8.4.25 Save Equation Preferences Dialog ...... 205 8.4.26 Server Dialog ...... 205 8.4.27 Tab Properties Dialog ...... 206 8.4.28 Unlock/Register MathType Dialog ...... 206 8.4.29 Web and GIF Preferences Dialog ...... 207 8.4.30 Workspace Preferences Dialog ...... 209 8.4.31 Zoom Dialog ...... 210 8.5 Keyboard shortcuts ...... 211 8.5.1 Formatting ...... 211 8.5.2 Menu Commands ...... 211 8.5.3 Navigation and Selection ...... 215 8.5.4 Keyboard Modifiers (one-shots) ...... 216 8.5.5 Toolbar Commands ...... 216 8.5.6 Window Control ...... 217 8.5.7 Symbol Palettes ...... 217 8.5.8 Template Palettes ...... 229 8.6 Toolbars ...... 240 8.6.1 Toolbar Overview ...... 241 8.6.2 Navigating with the keyboard ...... 241 8.6.3 Viewing and Positioning ...... 242 8.6.4 Symbol Palettes ...... 243 8.6.5 Template Palettes ...... 243 8.6.6 Small Bar ...... 243 8.6.7 Tabs ...... 244 8.6.8 Large Tabbed Bar ...... 244 8.6.9 Small Tabbed Bar ...... 244 9. Getting More Help ...... 246 9.1 Ways to Get Assistance While You Work ...... 246 9.2 Getting help at the Design Science website ...... 246 9.3 Technical Support ...... 246 9.4 Giving us Feedback ...... 247 10. License Agreements ...... 248

4 MathType for Windows

10.1 MathType's End-user License Agreement ...... 248 10.2 Questions and Answers About your License Agreement ...... 248 10.3 Font License Agreement ...... 249 10.4 Multi-user and Site Licensing ...... 250 11. Glossary ...... 251 11.1 Baseline...... 252 11.2 Blackboard bold (double-stroked) ...... 252 11.3 Chapter/Section Breaks ...... 252 11.4 Character Descriptions ...... 253 11.5 Character Style ...... 253 11.6 Clipboard ...... 253 11.7 Current Equation ...... 253 11.8 Default Web Browser ...... 253 11.9 Display Equation ...... 254 11.10 EGO (Edit Graphic Object) ...... 254 11.11 EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) ...... 254 11.12 Equation Preferences ...... 254 11.13 Expanding Integrals...... 254 11.14 Factory Settings ...... 255 11.15 Fences ...... 255 11.16 Focus ...... 255 11.17 Font ...... 255 11.18 Font Encoding ...... 255 11.19 Fraktur (Old German) ...... 256 11.20 Function ...... 256 11.21 GIF (Graphics Interchange Format) ...... 256 11.22 Inline Equation ...... 256 11.23 Insertion Point ...... 256 11.24 Keyboard Shortcuts...... 257 11.25 LaTeX ...... 257 11.26 Left-Numbered Display Equation ...... 257 11.27 Math Axis ...... 258 11.28 MathML ...... 258 11.29 New Equation Preferences ...... 258 11.30 Nudging...... 258 11.31 OLE (Object Linking and Embedding) ...... 258 11.32 OMML (Office Math Markup Language) ...... 259 11.33 Pile ...... 259 11.34 Points ...... 259 11.35 Relational Operator ...... 259 11.36 Right-Numbered Display Equation ...... 259 11.37 Slot ...... 259 11.38 Styles ...... 260 11.39 Symbol ...... 260

5 MathType for Windows

11.40 Template ...... 260 11.41 TeX ...... 260 11.42 TeX Language Input ...... 260 11.43 Texvc ...... 261 11.44 TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) ...... 261 11.45 Typesizes ...... 261 11.46 Unicode ...... 261 11.47 Units ...... 262 11.48 WMF (Windows Metafile) ...... 262 11.49 The World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) ...... 262

6 MathType for Windows

1. Welcome to MathType 6.9

Thank you for evaluating and purchasing MathType.

Evaluating MathType

If you have installed MathType without a product key, you can evaluate MathType's full feature set for 30 days. After the 30 days are up, MathType will go into Lite Mode. If you decide not to purchase MathType, you can continue to use MathType in Lite Mode and edit MathType equations. If you had been using our Equation Editor product before you installed MathType, you can continue to use it by uninstalling MathType. However, Equation Editor cannot edit equations created in MathType. See Equation Editor, Evaluating MathType and Lite Mode(See 3.1) for more details and instructions on how to purchase a product key to unlock MathType.

Getting Started

If you are new to MathType, we highly encourage you to take several minutes to run through our Basic Tutorials(See 4.2). Creating equations with MathType is not difficult but there are a few concepts that you will need that will make it even easier. Our Technical Support Manager says, "Whenever I have recommended to users to read through the tutorials, their feedback was that they had found it to have been invaluable."

Those already familiar with MathType will want to review the New Features(See 2.) in this release.

See Also: New Features(See 2.) Basic Tutorials(See 4.2) Equation Editor, Evaluating MathType, and Lite Mode(See 3.1)

7 MathType for Windows

2. New Features in MathType 6.9

MathType 6.9 for Windows new features:

 Support for Windows 8: MathType 6.9 works with the latest version of Windows.  Support for Microsoft Office 2013: MathType 6.9 adds a MathType tab to Word 2013 and PowerPoint 2013, similar to that in earlier versions of Microsoft Office.  New MathPage(See 6.1.2.14) targets: You can now create pages that will display with the open source MathJax display engine .  MathType works with 700+ software applications and websites: MathType 6.9 adds the capability to work with additional software apps and websites. Notable additions are Connexions, Desire2Learn, Poll Everywhere, Stack Exchange, and Top Hat Monocle. See Using MathType with Applications and Websites(See 7.) for details.

Known issues:

 Limited STIX font support: MathType 6.9 supports the STIX General font for all styles except Symbol and Extra Math in the Define Styles dialog. Other STIX fonts are not supported in this release.  Windows 7 -- Error messages: There is an issue that in isolated cases can cause error messages with Word 2007 in a Windows 7 environment. If you try to insert an equation into Word and receive an error message to the effect that there was a "problem sending your equation preferences" to MathType, followed by a second error message that the program used to create the equation "is not installed on your computer", refer to our Technical Notice on the subject.  Windows 7 -- Wrong taskbar icon: When installed in a Windows 7 environment, there are certain conditions that will cause the taskbar to display the incorrect icon for MathType. This is an issue only with displaying the icon, and performance is not affected. In both of the situations shown below, MathType will operate normally.

Correct icon: Incorrect icon:

8 MathType for Windows

3. Comparing MathType, Equation Editor, and MathType Lite Mode

In This Chapter Equation Editor, Evaluating MathType, and Lite Mode(See 3.1) MathType Features Not Available in Lite Mode(See 3.2) Purchasing a Product Key and Unlocking MathType(See 3.3) Collaborating with Equation Editor Users(See 3.4) 3.1 Equation Editor, Evaluating MathType, and Lite Mode

Evaluating MathType for 30 days

If you have evaluated MathType for 30 days without purchasing and entering a product key, MathType will go into Lite Mode. You can purchase a product key from our Online Store , through email, or by calling our sales line. Once you have a valid product key, you can use the Unlock/Register MathType... command on MathType's Help menu to unlock MathType and gain permanent access to all its features -- there is no need to download or install MathType again. See Purchasing a Product Key and Unlocking MathType(See 3.3) for more information. If you decide not to buy

If by the end of the 30 day evaluation period you decide not to purchase a MathType product key, you can uninstall MathType. If you use Microsoft Office, or any of the many other word processors and applications that come with our Equation Editor product, you can go back to using it. However, we recommend that you not uninstall MathType, but continue to use it in its Lite Mode. This will give you the same functionality as Equation Editor but will make it easier to work with friends and colleagues that own MathType. You will be able to edit the equations in documents they create but won't be able to use any of MathType's added features. And, if you change your mind later, you can simply purchase a MathType product key and unlock MathType -- there is no need to download or install MathType again.

See Also: MathType Features Not Available in Lite Mode(See 3.2)

9 MathType for Windows 3.2 MathType Features Not Available in Lite Mode

When MathType runs in Lite Mode the following features are changed or disabled:

 Saving equation files and printing are disabled.  Only the toolbar's symbol and template palettes can be used.  MathType's additional symbols and templates in the palettes are disabled.  MathType's Commands for Word are disabled.  The Insert Symbol dialog is hidden.  The Color menu is hidden (existing colors are still used).  List of functions recognized cannot be customized.  Preference files cannot be loaded or saved.  Keyboard shortcuts cannot be defined.  Ruler and tab stops are disabled.  Cannot convert equations to TeX or MathML.  Pasting TeX and MathML into MathType is disabled. Since many websites rely on either TeX or MathML, this severely limits the number of websites, forums, and blogs MathType will work with.  These commands are disabled: o Show Nesting o Fence Alignment o Size>Larger and Size>Smaller o User 1 & User 2 Styles & Sizes o Web and GIF Preferences o Workspace Preferences (size of toolbar buttons, empty slot thickness & color, etc.)

A big advantage of MathType in Lite Mode over Equation Editor is that it can edit all equations created by MathType. MathType in Lite Mode cannot insert all the symbols or templates that MathType can, but all of the existing symbols and templates in an equation can be edited. This makes collaboration between MathType users and non-MathType users easier than ever before. See Collaborating with Equation Editor Users(See 3.4) for more information. 3.3 Purchasing a Product Key and Unlocking MathType

MathType running in Lite Mode can be unlocked (i.e., upgraded to the full version of MathType) at any time. All you need to do is purchase a copy of MathType and unlock MathType using the product key that you receive.

10 MathType for Windows

Options for Purchasing MathType

Online

Order MathType from our Online Store .

By Email

By Phone

Call our toll-free number: +1 (800) 827-0685 (US and Canada only), +1 (562) 432-2920 (outside the US and Canada).

Hours of Operation:

Monday - Friday, 8am to 5pm, Pacific time (GMT-8)

Unlock and Register MathType

 Open MathType, and choose the Unlock/Register MathType… command on the Help menu.  Enter the requested information into the dialog.  In order to receive free technical support, upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing, register your copy of MathType by entering your email and ensuring the check box is selected that allows your information to be sent to Design Science. 3.4 Collaborating with Equation Editor Users

From time to time, you may need to collaborate with other people on a document containing equations. If they possess a copy of MathType 4 or newer you should not have any problems. For full compatibility they should use MathType 6, particularly if you're using some of its new equation numbering features.

Many people have a copy of our Equation Editor, either from Microsoft Word or from another product (Corel WordPerfect, etc.). For various reasons it's not possible to provide full compatibility between these versions of Equation Editor and MathType. However, there is a way of using MathType 6 that provides a better solution.

MathType can be downloaded from the MathType website for a 30-day trial. This is the full version, and for 30 days you or a collaborator can use it free of charge. Its functionality is not limited in any way. After the trial period has ended, MathType runs in what we call Lite mode. This provides similar functionality to Equation Editor. However, with MathType Lite you or a collaborator can edit all equations created with MathType 6, making it the ideal tool for people who need to collaborate with you on technical documents. Of course it's nowhere near as convenient to use as MathType, but for occasional collaboration it's a practical solution. MathType Lite can also be upgraded at any time to the full version of MathType 6, without having to re-install. See Using MathType Lite and Equation Editor(See 3.1).

11 MathType for Windows

If you are collaborating with an Equation Editor user, you can turn off the option in MathType's Equation Conversion Manager(See 4.1.7) so that Equation Editor will be used instead of MathType for editing existing Equation Editor equations.

See Also

MathType Setup Dialog(See 4.1.3) 4.1.2 Installing Unlocked or in Evaluation Mode

When you install MathType, you can either install it unlocked or in a 30-day evaluation mode.

You must have a valid product key to unlock MathType. The product key is on the payment confirmation web page and also in the order confirmation email you received. o Once you've obtained a product key, enter your information.

13 MathType for Windows o In order to receive free technical support, upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing, register your copy of MathType by entering your email and ensuring the check box that allows the installer to send your information to Design Science is selected. o Click OK.

If you don't have a product key, you can evaluate MathType by choosing the Evaluate MathType for 30 days option during installation. The full version of MathType will be installed, and you will enjoy the same functionality as the unlocked version. Towards the end of the evaluation period you'll start receiving messages when you start MathType informing you how much of the evaluation period remains. You can unlock MathType at any time with a valid product key, without reinstalling. Choose the Unlock/Register MathType… command on MathType's Help menu and enter the product key into the dialog that opens.

Once the evaluation period has expired, MathType starts running in MathType Lite mode. This provides a level of functionality similar to our Equation Editor product. An added bonus is that MathType Lite is better for collaboration with MathType users than Equation Editor. See Collaborating with Equation Editor Users(See 3.4) for more information.

See Also

Purchasing a Product key and Unlocking MathType(See 3.3) Equation Editor, Evaluating MathType, and Lite Mode(See 3.1) 4.1.3 MathType Setup Dialog

This dialog allows you to either install MathType or remove an existing MathType installation. If you're installing for the first time the Remove button will be disabled.

Install

Click this option to install MathType to the folder shown in the Destination Folder box.

Destination Folder

Use this area to change the folder on your hard disk where Setup will install most of MathType's files. Use the Browse button to navigate to a folder. Setup will also install fonts and system files into appropriate system folders on your hard disk.

Click OK to begin the installation process. Click Exit to terminate Setup and abort the installation.

Remove

Click this option to remove MathType from the folder shown in the Remove MathType from box.

Remove MathType from

Use this box to choose which folder on your hard disk Setup will remove MathType from. Use the Browse button to navigate to a folder. Details on the files installed by Setup are included

14 MathType for Windows in the MathType Administrator's Kit available in the support section of the Design Science website .

Click OK to begin the removal process. Click Exit to close Setup and abort the removal. 4.1.4 Installing over an older version

MathType 5 and MathType 6 cannot be installed simultaneously, and MathType 6's installation process removes MathType 5. You'll still be able to exchange documents containing MathType 5 equations as the equations are fully compatible.

If you're currently using an earlier version (3.x or before) you have the option of overwriting it or installing MathType 6 into another folder. The decision as to whether or not to replace your old version of MathType with a new one is one you should consider carefully. Overwriting an old version of MathType

If you choose to overwrite the older version of MathType, any equations you created with the old version will be automatically updated to the new version of MathType whenever you edit them. Normally, this is what you want as it lets you use the features of the new version of MathType when editing your equations.

If you send documents containing equations to your friends and associates, converting equations to the new version is not a problem unless:

 They need to edit the equations (viewing and printing are not a problem), and  They do not have the new version of MathType and are not willing to upgrade.

If both of the above are true, leave the old version of MathType installed. This way, when you edit old equations the old version of MathType will be invoked. When you create new equations, you will have your choice of using the old or new version of MathType. 4.1.5 Removing the application

To remove MathType, do one of the following:

 Choose Remove MathType from the MathType 6 sub-menu of the Windows Start menu or,  Choose Control Panel from the Windows Start menu, double-click Add/Remove Programs, choose MathType 6 from the list of removable applications.

This will run MathType Setup with the Remove option pre-selected. Follow the instructions presented in Setup's dialogs. 4.1.6 Moving MathType to a different folder

If you decide to move MathType and its components to a different folder on your hard disk, DO NOT just move the files using the Windows Explorer. This will not properly update MathType

15 MathType for Windows and the OLE entries in the Windows Registry and MathType will not work properly. We recommend removing MathType and then re-installing it in the new location.

See Also

Removing MathType(See 4.1.5) Installing MathType(See 4.1) 4.1.7 Using Equation Conversion Manager

You can use the Equation Conversion Manager to control the kinds of equations for which MathType will be the designated editor. For example, once you have installed MathType, double-clicking an equation you created using the Equation Editor that came with Microsoft Office will automatically convert it to a MathType equation. If you don't like this, Equation Conversion Manager is the tool you use to change it.

Running the Equation Conversion Manager

To run the Equation Conversion Manager, simply choose it from the MathType 6 sub-menu of the Windows Start menu. A dialog will be displayed with two lists of equation types: o The left list contains equation types that will be converted to MathType equations when you double-click them. o The right list contains equation types that will not be converted, but will be edited using the equation editing application that was used to create them.

Use the two Move buttons in between the lists to move selected equation types from one list to the other.

Show equation types for

This part of the dialog allows you to show just those equation types for which the editor is installed (installed editors only) or show all equation types even for those that are part of products you do not own (all MathType-compatible editors). The latter choice allows you to decide which editor is used for equations contained in a document that an associate might give to you.

Details

Click this button to see details of each equation editor's OLE(See 11.31) registration. This is information that is only useful for troubleshooting OLE problems.

MathType 6 Details

Click this button to see details of MathType's OLE(See 11.31) registration. This is information that is only useful for troubleshooting OLE problems

16 MathType for Windows

4.1.8 Checking For the Latest Version

MathType supports both automatic and manual checking to find out if a newer version of MathType is available. The checks access the latest MathType version information via your Internet connection. After checking the version, a dialog will be displayed letting you know the results of the comparison.

MathType will normally perform this check once a month. If you want to check more often, manually choose the Check for Latest Version Now… command on the same menu whenever you want to check for a newer version.

If there isn't a newer version of MathType available, the version check may occasionally display information about other Design Science products that have been released. If you'd prefer not to see these, either click the Don't show me this again checkbox in the message, or uncheck the Show Tips command on the MathType on the Web sub-menu(See 8.3.13) of the Help menu(See 8.3.12). 4.2 Basic Tutorials

In This Chapter Before You Start(See 4.2.1) Fractions and Square Roots(See 4.2.2) Sums, Subscripts & Superscripts(See 4.2.3) Editing Old Equations(See 4.2.4) What To Do Next(See 4.2.5) 4.2.1 Before You Start

This chapter contains several tutorial examples of using MathType. We provide step-by-step instructions for each example, so you should find it easy to work through them. You can find symbols and templates either in the palettes at the very top of the MathType window, or in the bars lower down. You have to click on the palettes to open them and find the items you need, but you can just click on the symbols & templates in the bars. You can change the contents of these bars at any time. See Using MathType's Toolbar(See 4.3.3).

Fonts and the Appearance of Your Equations

The tutorials will often tell you that "your equation should now look like this." In fact, the appearance of your equation will be determined by the fonts you are using, so you shouldn't take this statement too literally. MathType's default fonts are Times New Roman, Symbol, and MT Extra. These fonts will probably be acceptable, at least for the purposes of working through the tutorial, and we recommend that you stick with them until you've gained some experience working with MathType.

17 MathType for Windows

For the time being, please do not change fonts by choosing Other on the Style menu - as you'll see in Fonts and Styles(See 4.3.1), there's a much better way of doing this in MathType.

About the level of math in the tutorials

The level of math in some of the tutorials may be much more advanced than the math you deal with every day, but don't worry. You should continue through the tutorials anyway, because the techniques you will learn in order to work through this advanced math will be exactly the same techniques you will use at any level.

Some Final Advice

In the first few tutorial examples, we're going to assume that you're using MathType along with Microsoft Word to create a document. If you want to work through the tutorials using some other word processing application, it should be easy to adapt the instructions that follow. Also, instructions for using MathType with other applications are available in Using MathType with Applications and Websites(See 7.). 4.2.2 Fractions and Square Roots

Like we mentioned in the previous topic(See 4.2.1), the level of math in these tutorials may not be the same level of math you deal with every day. In order to create these equations, you'll use the same techniques you'll need at any level.

In our first tutorial, we will create the equation

This is a very simple equation, but you'll learn about fractions and square root templates, and we'll explore the properties of the insertion point, and illustrate MathType's function recognition and automatic spacing capabilities. Opening MathType

There are several ways to open MathType, and which one of these methods you use will depend on how you intend to use MathType. Some software has commands and buttons to open MathType from within the software. For the purpose of this tutorial, we won't be working in a document, nor with any other software. When you installed MathType, the installer may have put an icon on the desktop. If so, you can open MathType by double-clicking this icon. Alternatively, you can look for a MathType 6 folder inside the Windows Start menu. Click MathType inside this folder. Creating the equation

To create the equation, just follow the steps listed below. Remember that the characters you have to type into the equation are shown in bold type.

1. In the MathType window, type y=. You don't have to type a space between the y and the =, because MathType takes care of the spacing automatically. To help you break the habit of typing spaces, the spacebar is disabled most of the time in MathType, so pressing it will have

18 MathType for Windows no effect (other than producing an annoying beep!). The Define Spacing Dialog(See 8.4.5) discusses where and how you should enter spaces in MathType, but you won't have to do this very often.

Also, notice that the y has been made italic, but the = sign has not. Mathematical variables are almost always printed in italics, so this is the default in MathType. You can change this by redefining the Variable style using the Define command on MathType's Style menu(See 8.3.8).

2. Now we need to enter a square root sign. To do this, click on the icon in the Small Bar.

The template's home is in the palette, but we've also copied it into the Small Bar to make it easier for you to find. Your equation should now look like this:

The characters in the equation might be larger than you expect, but this is just a result of the viewing scale you're using. Choose Zoom from the View menu to change the viewing scale to anything between 25% and 800%. The blinking insertion point should be in the slot under the square root sign, indicating that whatever you enter next will appear there.

3. Next, we enter a fraction template. To do this, click on the palette. Notice there are two fractions shown on the top row. The first one is the full-size fraction. Click on the second one. This template produces reduced-size fractions, sometimes known as "case" fractions in the typesetting world. Case fractions are generally used to save space when the numerator and denominator of the fraction are just plain numbers. Be careful not to choose the larger template - this would create a full-size fraction, which would be too big for this situation. Notice how MathType automatically expands the size of the square root sign to accommodate the fraction. Your equation should now look like this:

The insertion point should be in the numerator (upper) slot of the fraction template.

Fraction Template As you hold the mouse pointer over the palette items their name is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the MathType window. This will help you make sure you pick the correct template.

4. To enter the numerator of the fraction, type 3.

5. Now we need to move the insertion point into the denominator slot of the fraction. You can do this by pressing the Tab key or by clicking inside the denominator slot in your equation.

6. Enter the denominator by typing 16.

19 MathType for Windows

7. Next we need to add the sin x outside of the square root sign, and to do this we have to get the insertion point into the correct position in the hierarchy of slots that make up the equation. If you repeatedly press the Tab key, you can make the insertion point cycle through all the slots in the formula. If you hold down the Shift key while you do this, the insertion point will cycle through the slots in the reverse direction. Try this out to see how it works. Three of the positions that the insertion point will assume during the course of this cycling are shown below. Use a viewing scale of 400% or 800%, so that you can see what's happening a little better:

If you use the Show Nesting command on the View menu, you can get an even better picture of the hierarchical arrangement of slots in your equation:

We have to decide which of these insertion point positions is the right one for adding sin x . The position on the left is clearly wrong - we don't want sin x to go in the denominator of the fraction. In the position shown in the center, the insertion point is in the main slot under the square root sign, so if we type in sin x the result will be the following formula:

This is not what we want either. The insertion point position shown on the far right is the correct one; the insertion point is outside the square root, which is where we want sin x to go.

8. Keep pressing the Tab key until the insertion point arrives in the correct position, and then type in the letters sinx. Type slowly, so that you can watch what happens. When you initially type them, the s and the i will be italic, because MathType assumes that they are variables. However, as soon as you type the n, MathType recognizes that sin is an abbreviation for the sine function. Following standard typesetting rules, MathType uses plain Roman (non-italic) format for sin, and inserts a thin space (one sixth of an em) between sin and x.

Functions You can customize the list of functions that MathType automatically recognizes. Including Text in an Equation(See 4.3.2) contains an example.

9. Type -c. Remember you don't have to type the spaces. You insert the minus sign by pressing the - (minus/hyphen) key on your keyboard. In a word processor, pressing this key inserts a hyphen, which is typically shorter than a minus sign. However, since hyphens are very uncommon in mathematics, MathType replaces them with minus signs for you (when the Math style is in effect). Your equation should now look like this:

20 MathType for Windows

10. Next we need to attach the superscript (or exponent) to the c . To do this, click on the icon in the Small Bar. This will create a superscript slot next to the c , as shown below:

Keyboard Shortcuts You can also create a superscript slot by typing Ctrl+H ("H" = "high"). Ctrl+L inserts a subscript slot ("L" = "low).

11. Type 2, and then press Tab to move the insertion point out of the superscript slot, into the position shown below:

12. Click on the ± in the Small Bar. MathType knows that the ± symbol is supposed to have spaces around it in this situation, so as usual, you don't have to type them.

13. Choose the m from the palette - it's the second one from the right in the row of Symbol Palettes. Alternatively, as the Greek letter corresponds to the letter m, you can press Ctrl+G, followed by m. Your equation should look like this:

Greek Characters You can enter a Greek character using Ctrl+G and its equivalent, e.g. m for , P for .

14. Finish the formula by typing tanx. Again, notice that MathType uses plain (instead of italic) type for the tan function and puts thin spaces on either side of it. Your finished equation should look like this:

4.2.3 Sums, Subscripts & Superscripts

In this tutorial we'll create the formula that is often used to calculate a statistical quantity known as variance. The formula is:

21 MathType for Windows

This formula illustrates the use of subscripts, superscripts, and summation templates. Integral and product templates behave much the same as summation templates, so what you learn in this tutorial will be useful in a variety of other situations. The steps required to create the formula are as follows:

If you're not using Word... Some of the steps in this tutorial refer to Word's menu, toolbar, or Ribbon. These steps may be adapted to apply to any of the over 600 applications and websites that work with MathType, so if you're not using Word, look for an Insert Equation or an Insert Object command. If your application or website does not have these commands, try copy & paste. You may be able to find more specific instructions for particular applications or websites on the MathType website.

1. Open a new Word document, and type a few lines of text.

2. Choose Insert Display Equation from Word's MathType menu, MathType toolbar, or the MathType tab in Office 2007-2013's ribbon interface. This will open a MathType window, ready for you to start creating the equation.

3. Enter a One way to do this is to choose it from the palette. Alternatively, you could use its keyboard shortcut. The keyboard shortcuts for toolbar items are displayed in the status bar as you move the mouse over them. In this case you can press Ctrl+G followed by s.

4. Next, create a slot for the superscript on the by clicking on the icon in the Small Bar. Subscripts and superscripts are rather small. In order to better see what's happening, make sure you've chosen at least 200% viewing scale in the Zoom submenu of the View menu.

Zoom Levels A quick way to change zoom level is to right-click in the Zoom panel on the status bar. Or, you can type: Ctrl+1 for 100%, Ctrl+2 for 200%, Ctrl+4 for 400%, or Ctrl+8 for 800%.

22 MathType for Windows

5. The insertion point will be located in the newly created superscript slot. Type the superscript 2.

6. Now let's move the insertion point to the location shown below:

The best way to position the insertion point outside the superscript slot is to press the Tab key. If you choose to click the mouse, be careful not to place the pointer too close to the superscript slot, or else the insertion point may jump back into it when you click.

7. Type in the = sign. Remember not to type any spaces.

8. Construct the fraction by using the full-size template, which is available in the Small Bar and in the palette. Be careful - it's not the same template as the fraction template that we used in Fractions and Square Roots(See 4.2.2).

Inserting Fractions You can also insert the fraction template by pressing Ctrl+F.

9. The insertion point will be located in the newly-created numerator slot; type the number 1 into this slot.

10. Move the insertion point down into the denominator slot either by clicking in it or by pressing the Tab key. Type in the denominator N, and press the Tab key to move the insertion point out of the denominator slot. Your equation should now look like this:

11. Click on the icon to enter a summation template. Your equation should now look like this:

12. Next we need to insert a pair of parentheses. You can do this either by clicking on the icon in the palette, or by using the Ctrl+9 keyboard shortcut.

13. Type the letter X into the summand slot (the large slot on the right).

14. Attach a subscript to the X, using the template. Type an i into the subscript slot.

15. Type -x.

16. Place a bar over the x by clicking on the icon in the palette. In MathType, embellishments of this type are always added to the character to the left of the insertion point.

23 MathType for Windows

You can even add several embellishments to the same character. For more details, see Embellishments(See 8.5.7.4).

17. Press tab to move the insertion point outside the parentheses, making sure to stay within the summand. In fact, as we saw in Fractions and Square Roots(See 4.2.2), if you keep pressing the Tab key, the insertion point will cycle through all the slots in the equation and will eventually reach the position shown, regardless of where it started out. You might want to use Show Nesting on the View menu to make this easier. Your equation should now look like this:

18. Enter the superscript 2 by using the template. Type a 2 into the superscript slot.

19. Press Tab to move the insertion point into the lower limit slot of the summation template, and type i=1. As usual, do not type any spaces. MathType will automatically reduce the size of the text, and will center it below the summation sign. In this case, MathType will not insert any spaces around the = sign, since it is in the limit of a summation. Again, this is a standard typesetting convention that you can override if you want to.

20. Press Tab to move to the upper limit slot of the summation template, and type in the upper limit, N. The equation is now complete (well, maybe it is - see the next step).

21. We hope you're happy with the way MathType formats your equation, but, if you're not, we've provided a way for you to make some fine adjustments of your own. You can select any item or group of items in the usual way, and nudge them either horizontally or vertically in steps of one pixel (screen dot). If you view your equation at 800% scale you can make adjustments as small as an eighth of a point.

To nudge items, use the following keystrokes:

Ctrl + nudges the selected items to the left by one pixel Ctrl + nudges the selected items upward by one pixel Ctrl + nudges the selected items to the right by one pixel Ctrl + nudges the selected items downward by one pixel

Selecting an Embellishment You can select an embellishment, such as the bar over the x in this example, by holding down the Ctrl key and then clicking on the embellishment. You might want to try moving a subscript or a superscript, moving the limits of the summation, or even moving the bar embellishment.

Keep in mind, however, that nudging is really intended for making small adjustments that cannot be achieved otherwise. The preferred method for

24 MathType for Windows

adjusting spacing is using the Define Spacing Dialog(See 8.4.5). This approach has the advantage that the spacing rules you define affect all equations.

22. Close the MathType window, which will insert the equation into your Word document. Save the document, because we're going to use it in the next tutorial. 4.2.4 Editing Old Equations

This tutorial teaches you some special editing techniques that are useful when you're modifying an existing equation. You will often need to correct a mistake in an old equation, or make a new one that is a slight variation of one that you have made in the past. Instead of starting from scratch, you can bring a copy of the old equation back into MathType and modify it as needed. In this way, all your old documents serve as sources of material for new documents. You can store commonly used equations (or fragments of equations) in word processing documents or as expressions within MathType itself.

Let's suppose the equation we created in Sums, Subscripts & Superscripts(See 4.2.3) is the wrong one, and we want to use the following related formula in our document instead:

The steps required are as follows:

1. Open the document containing the equation you created in Sums, Subscripts & Superscripts(See 4.2.3) above. We want to bring this equation back into MathType for editing. The simplest way to do this is to double-click it. This will open the equation for editing in a new MathType window.

2. Select the term on the left-hand side of the equation by dragging the arrow pointer across it while holding down the left mouse button. MathType will highlight selected items by applying your chosen Selection color to the background of the selected area (see Workspace Preferences dialog(See 8.4.30)). It should look like this:

3. Delete the selected items by using the Clear command on the Edit menu, or by pressing the Backspace key or the Delete key.

4. The insertion point is in the right place, immediately to the left of the = sign, so you can now enter the new left-hand side. Type in the letter s and attach the N-1 subscript to it by using the template, in the usual way.

25 MathType for Windows

5. Next, we're going to enclose the right-hand side in a square root sign. We're going to "wrap" a template around the existing terms - previously we have always inserted templates first, and then filled in their slots afterwards. Select the entire right-hand side of the equation, watching the highlighting carefully to see that your selection is correct. It should look like this:

Now click on the icon in the Small Bar. The template will be inserted into your equation and automatically wrapped around the selected items. When you insert a template, MathType always wraps it around any selected items.

6. You might be wondering how you would do the reverse of the operation we performed in step 5. Suppose you had an expression enclosed in a square root sign (or some other template) and you wanted to remove the square root sign but keep the expression. To do this, you first select the expression under the square root sign and choose Cut to transfer it to the Clipboard. Next, select the (now empty) square root sign, and press Backspace or Delete to remove it. Finally, choose Paste to bring the expression back from the Clipboard.

7. Finally, we have to change the N in the denominator of the fraction to N – 1. Position the insertion point in the denominator slot, to the right of the N, by clicking near the point indicated by the arrow pointer in the picture below:

Then, simply type -1 to change the denominator.

8. Let's now suppose we want to change the color of the term from black to red. Select the term using the mouse, and then choose the Color command on the Format menu. A submenu appears containing a list of colors. Choose Red. The selected term will become red (you will have to click outside the equation to de-select the term in order to see the new color).

Color You can customize the Color menu by choosing Edit Color Menu in the MathType menu under Format Color.

9. We're finished editing the equation, so close the MathType window. If a dialog appears asking if you want to save your changes, click Yes. Once the MathType window has closed, your word processor will become active and you'll see your document now contains the modified equation, which should look like this:

26 MathType for Windows

4.2.5 What To Do Next

By completing these tutorials, you've gone through the basics of using MathType and can start using equations in your documents. However, there's still a lot more you can do in MathType. See More Tutorials(See 4.3). 4.3 More Tutorials

In This Chapter Fonts and Styles(See 4.3.1) Including Text in an Equation(See 4.3.2) Using MathType's Toolbar(See 4.3.3) Spacing and Alignment(See 4.3.4) A Simple Matrix(See 4.3.5) Equation Numbering in Microsoft Word(See 4.3.6) Advanced Equation Numbering in Microsoft Word(See 4.3.7) Setting Up a Microsoft Word 2007-2013 Document(See 4.3.8) Setting Up a Microsoft Word 2002-2003 Document(See 4.3.9) Formatting with Tabs(See 4.3.10) Inserting Unusual Symbols(See 4.3.11) Creating Web Pages with Microsoft Word(See 4.3.12) Creating Web Pages with GIF Files(See 4.3.13) Customizing the Keyboard(See 4.3.14) Working with TeX, LaTeX, & MathML(See 4.3.15) Exporting Equations in Microsoft Word(See 4.3.16) Simplifying Rational Expressions by Dividing Common Factors(See 4.3.17) What To Do Next(See 4.3.18) 4.3.1 Fonts and Styles

This tutorial provides an introduction to MathType's system of styles. We will demonstrate how to change the fonts in your equations by changing style definitions. Using styles will allow you to achieve the formatting you want quickly and easily, and enable you to create equations with a consistent appearance. See Style menu(See 8.3.8) for more information about styles, fonts and sizes.

In the following steps, we will create the equation

27 MathType for Windows

and experiment with changing the look of the equation by using different style definitions.

1. Check that the Status Bar's Style panel displays "Math". If it doesn't, choose Math from the Style menu. If the Math style is not chosen, MathType's automatic style assignment will not be in effect, and the rest of this tutorial will not make much sense.

2. Create the equation, using the template for the fraction and inserting the and by choosing them from the lowercase Greek palette, or by using the Ctrl+G shortcut. The " " operator is located on the palette. The equation should now look like this:

3. From the Style menu, choose Define. If necessary, click on the Simple button to display the dialog shown below.

Change the "Primary font" to Euclid, change the "Greek and math fonts" to Euclid Symbol and Euclid Extra, as shown in the dialog above, and then click Apply. On screen, your equation will now look like this:

The Euclid fonts supplied with MathType are based on the Computer Modern fonts typically used with TeX(See 11.41) so they give your documents a TeX-like appearance that you might prefer for some types of work. Another benefit of the Euclid fonts is that their regular and Greek characters have a consistent size, whereas Times and Symbol are somewhat mismatched. Of course, if you use the Euclid fonts in your equations, you will probably want to use Euclid as the primary body font in your word processing document, too.

The TeX Look We've included a MathType preference file called TeXLook.eqp that contains font and spacing settings that make MathType

28 MathType for Windows

equations look like TeX. It's in the Preferences folder inside your MathType folder. See Preferences menu(See 8.3.10) for more details on using preference files.

4. Open the Define Styles dialog, and click on "Factory settings" to return to using the Times New Roman and Symbol fonts.

5. Click on the Advanced button to display a more extensive form of the Define Styles dialog. This is shown below:

TIP The changes you make in this dialog apply to the current equation. Check "Use for new equations" to use the settings for new equations as well.

The names of the eleven styles are listed in the dialog box, together with the font and character style assigned to each. The equation you have just created uses the Function, Variable, L.C. Greek, Number, and Symbol styles. The letters "exp" are recognized as the abbreviation for the exponential function, and are assigned the Function style; u, x, and y are treated as variables and assigned the Variable style; and being lowercase Greek letters, are assigned the L.C. (lowercase) Greek style, and the numbers in the fraction use the Number style. The symbols =, , (, ), and + use the Symbol style. (The angle brackets and fraction bar are internal to MathType and do not use a style.) These styles are applied automatically as you create the equation, because you are using the Math style mode. This automatic style assignment is the advantage you gain by using the Math style mode when creating equations.

29 MathType for Windows

More About Styles The subject of MathType's styles is covered in more detail in Style menu(See 8.3.8).

We're going to change some of the styles so you understand how they affect an equation's appearance. Normally you wouldn't work this way; you'd change fonts using the Simple version of this dialog.

6. Choose a new font for the Function style. The style is probably defined as Times New Roman. Press on the arrow next to the font name in the Function row and choose a different font. You will want to choose a font that looks noticeably different from Times New Roman, so that the effect of the change will be obvious. A good choice would be a sans serif font such as Arial.

7. Choose the OK button. Your equation will be redisplayed using the new Function style definition. Your equation should now look like this:

The function abbreviation, exp, is displayed using the new font. Of course, you probably wouldn't want your equation to look like this - we're simply demonstrating the effect of changing the Function style definition.

The Variable style definition is used for all ordinary alphabetic characters except for the ones in function abbreviations. In the current equation, this includes u, x, and y. Very often, according to convention, the only difference you want between the Variable and Function styles is for the Variable style to be defined as italic. Let's redefine the Variable style so that it's consistent with the new Function style definition.

Choosing Fonts A fast way to select a font is to click in the list and then type the first letter of the name. You can also use the scroll bar in the list to move around quickly.

8. Again, choose Define from the Style menu. In the Define Styles dialog box, press on the arrow next to font name in the Variable row, and choose the same font assigned to the Function style. Check that the italic character style is checked for Variable, but not for Function.

Let's also change the Number style so that it uses the same font as Function and Variable. You will find that this makes the equation look better. Finally, turn off the italic character style for the L.C. Greek style by removing the check in the Character Style column. Lowercase Greek letters are usually italicized, but let's experiment with this. Note that for the two Greek styles and the Symbol style you can only assign fonts with the same encoding (arrangement of characters) as the Symbol font. This typically restricts your choice to the Symbol font, the Euclid Symbol font, or some other similar font.

30 MathType for Windows

9. Choose the OK button. Your equation will be redisplayed using the new style definitions. If you are using the fonts we've recommended, the equation should now look like this:

The "variables" u, x, and y, and the numbers in the fraction now use the new font definitions, and the lower-case Greek letters and are no longer italicized. You may want to use style definitions such as these for equations in a document in which the text is written in Arial or Tahoma.

To reset the style definitions, open the Define Styles dialog and click "Factory settings".

TIP You can also double-click or right-click in the Style panel of the Status Bar to make the Style menu appear.

While working through this tutorial, you have probably noticed that each of the styles is also listed as a command on the Style menu. This allows you to explicitly assign a particular style to selected or subsequently-typed characters. The Other command on the Style menu can be used to assign any font available on your computer to selected or subsequently-typed characters. Please see Style menu(See 8.3.8) for further details. 4.3.2 Including Text in an Equation

In our next tutorial, we show you how to enter words and phrases in an equation, and also how to handle function name abbreviations that MathType does not recognize. We are going to create the following equation:

1. First, open a new MathType window using one of the methods you've already learned. Then type Prob(A|B). The result will be

Using its built-in table of function names, MathType has recognized Pr as an abbreviation for "probability" and set it in the Function style, while o and b are regarded as variables. In this tutorial, we want to use Prob, rather than just Pr, as our abbreviation for "probability". You might think that you can fix the problem by just making the o and b non-italic, but we don't recommend this. If you simply remove the italicization, MathType will still regard o and b as variables, which is not what we intend. The right approach is to select Prob and choose Function from the Style menu. This will remove the italics, but it also tells MathType that Prob is the name of a function, which will affect spacing and translation into languages such as LaTeX and MathML.

31 MathType for Windows

Controlling Italics To assign regular (non-italic) style to function names, use Function on the Style menu, rather than just removing the italics.

2. Create the fraction in the middle term of the equation. You can copy and paste Prob(A|B), and modify it for re-use in the numerator and denominator. You can find  the set intersection symbol, on the palette. Your equation should now look like

Copying and Dragging To re-use part of an existing equation, select the part and then use Copy and Paste, or drag and drop. Hold down the Ctrl key when dragging to copy the selection.

3. Construct the fraction on the right-hand side of the equation by using the template again.

The insertion point will be positioned in the numerator, ready to type the text.

Typing Text Before typing normal words and phrases, choose Text from the Style menu.

4. If you just start typing characters into the numerator slot, MathType will assume that they are variables, so they will be italicized, and any spaces you type will be ignored. To type ordinary words and phrases, you should first choose Text from the Style menu. Then type Probability that both A and B occur. The numerator of our fraction will look like this:

This is what we want, except that the word "both" should be bold and the A and B should be italic.

5. Select the word "both", and choose Other from the Style menu. The Other Style dialog will appear, which lets you directly change the font and style (bold & italic) of selected characters. Click on Bold, and then choose OK.

6. Next we want to make the variables A and B italic. We could do this directly by using Other from the Style menu again, but this would not really convey the correct meaning. A better approach is to select the variable A and choose Math from the Style menu, and then repeat for the variable B. This makes the A and B italic, but also tells MathType to treat them as mathematical variables.

32 MathType for Windows

7. Enter the denominator of the fraction using the same technique we used for the numerator.

This completes the equation, but we can use it to illustrate a few more of MathType's capabilities.

New Function Names You can customize the list of functions that MathType automatically recognizes.

If you use the abbreviation "Prob" for probability on a regular basis, you'll get tired of manually changing it to Function style all the time, and you'll want MathType to do this for you automatically. From the Preferences menu, choose Functions Recognized. Type Prob as the name of a new function, and click on the Add button. Also, if you don't want MathType to recognize Pr as an abbreviation for "probability", you can select Pr in the list of recognized functions and click on the Remove button.

Now try recreating this same equation, to see how much easier it is. 4.3.3 Using MathType's Toolbar

In the previous tutorials we saw two formulas that were very similar, in the sense that they had many terms in common. This is typical of many branches of mathematics. For example, consider these formulas from elementary statistics:

Many statistical formulae use the symbols  and , and they often involve various combinations of terms like When dealing with repetitive formulae like these you can save yourself a great deal of time by customizing MathType. To save time creating statistical formulae, we're going to place in the Small Bar. We'll also make expressions for and , and place them in the tabbed bars. Then we'll use them to create the second of the equations shown above. The steps are as follows:

Toolbar Icon Sizes Using the Workspace Preferences command on the Preferences menu you can alter the size of the toolbar icons.

33 MathType for Windows

1. Before we start, make sure that MathType's toolbar is visible and that the Small Bar and the Small and Large Tabbed Bars are visible. Use the commands in the View menu to make them visible if necessary.

2. Click on the symbol palette, and then release the mouse button. The palette will appear.

3. Now hold down the Alt key, press on the and, keeping the left mouse button down, drag it over the Small Bar. You'll see the mouse pointer change shape as it passes over different areas of the toolbar. When the pointer looks like this , the dragged item cannot be dropped at this location and releasing the mouse button will have no effect. When the pointer looks like this it is over a valid target area and releasing the mouse button will insert the object at this location. Release the mouse button over the Small Bar, as shown below.

The symbol will be added to the end of the bar. Now, to insert this symbol into an equation you only need click on it in the Small Bar instead of hunting for it in the palettes. The Small Bar is a good location for frequently used symbols as it is always available and can contain many items.

Adding New Symbols You can add any symbol from any font on your computer to the toolbar. Enter it into the equation area, select it, and drag it to the toolbar. Use the Insert Symbol dialog (on the Edit menu - see Inserting Unusual Symbols(See 4.3.11) for details) to locate the symbol, hold down the Alt key and drag the symbol to the toolbar. As a result, MathType has access to a virtually limitless supply of symbols.

4. Next, we're going to add a expression to the Large Tabbed Bar. The tabbed bars are similar to the Small Bar in how they operate, however they're divided into categories, which allows for a much larger number of items. Click on the Statistics tab to display MathType's default items for statistical equations. There should be room for one more item in the Large

34 MathType for Windows

Tabbed Bar (the bar has room for 8 items). If there isn't, select another tab that does have room.

5. Delete the current contents of the MathType window, and create the expression in the usual way. You'll need to use the template (not the template) to do this.

Editing Toolbar Expressions You can edit a toolbar expression by double-clicking. A new MathType window will open containing the expression. Make your changes, close the window and the toolbar will be updated.

6. To add this expression to the toolbar, select it and drag it to the Large Tabbed Bar. When you release the mouse you'll see the expression appear in the bar.

7. Create an expression for , in exactly the same way. Place this expression in the Small

Tabbed Bar. You can make the fraction full size, using the template, or you can make a case fraction using the template. When you're done, we're ready to create the formula

8. Creating this formula doesn't require any new techniques that you don't already know, so we're not going to give you the usual step-by-step instructions. Here are a few useful hints and reminders:

 You can insert by clicking on it in the Small Bar, which is much faster than using the palette.

 You can insert the term by clicking on it in the Large Tabbed Bar.

 A fast way to create is to insert , drag across the X to select it, and type Y to

replace it.

 You can create by inserting and replacing the subscript template with a

sub/superscript template. To do this, select the subscript slot as shown below, and hold

down the Ctrl key as you insert the template. The Ctrl key causes the new template to replace the selected one instead of wrapping around it. Then type 2 in the superscript slot.

35 MathType for Windows

 Note that the two terms inside curly brackets on the bottom line of the formula are identical except that one involves X and the other involves Y. To create the second term, just duplicate the first one and replace the X's with Y's.  You can duplicate a term by selecting it, holding down the Ctrl key and dragging it to the desired location (without the Ctrl key the term is moved).

Rearranging the Toolbar

MathType's toolbar is initially filled with expressions useful for many of the various fields in mathematics. You can, however, rename or delete the existing tabs, as well as rearrange or remove any of the symbols or expressions that are in the default toolbar. You can also modify any of the expressions if they're not quite right for your particular use.

To move a symbol or expression within the toolbar, hold down the Alt key and drag the item to its new location. You can insert an item between two others by dropping it between them.

9. Try this by dragging the symbol we added to the Small Bar in Step 3 to the Small Tabbed Bar. The choice of where to place an item is entirely up to you; a symbol or expression can be placed in any of the bars.

Now let's delete the from the Small Tabbed Bar.

10. Right-click the and select Delete from the context menu that appears. You may also want to delete the other expressions you added to the tabbed bars.

Deleting Toolbar Items Another way to delete an item is to Alt-drag it from the bar and release the mouse over an invalid target, e.g., outside the MathType window.

11. You can also change the names of the tabs to suit your particular situation. Double-click on the Statistics tab to open the Tab Properties dialog, where you can edit the tab's name and change its keyboard shortcut.

If you prefer typing to using the mouse, you may want to use the toolbar's keyboard interface. You can give the keyboard focus to a toolbar component using the following keyboard commands:

Symbol F5 Palette

Template F6 Palette

Small Bar F7

Large Tabbed F8 Bar

36 MathType for Windows

Small Tabbed F9 Bar

Once a bar has the focus, you can use the left and right arrows to move the selection, and Enter to insert the selected item (or open its corresponding menu). The Esc key closes a menu, or returns the focus to the equation area. You can switch tabs by typing Ctrl+F10, n where n is the number of the tab to activate. For example, typing Ctrl+F10, 2 activates the second tab.

Deciding What to Place in the Toolbar

Some symbols and templates are used so frequently that you may not need to place them in the toolbar. You probably will have memorized the keyboard shortcuts for inserting them, so there's not much to be gained by having them occupy valuable space in the toolbar. Greek symbols in particular fall into this category; once you've learned that you can insert a by pressing Ctrl+G followed by b (referred to as Ctrl+G, B), you probably won't need to add these characters to the toolbar.

Keyboard Shortcuts Keyboard shortcuts are covered in more detail in Customizing the Keyboard(See 4.3.14).

It may make sense, however, to add characters from any special fonts you may have to the toolbar. The easiest method is to use the Insert Symbol dialog (choose the Insert Symbol command on the Edit menu), which is an extremely powerful tool for viewing the characters in a font. You can also Alt-drag characters from this dialog to the toolbar. You can add as many characters from your fonts to the toolbar as can fit. Then you can enter these characters at any time into your equations, regardless of your current style definitions.

Insert Symbol Dialog Using this dialog is covered in more detail in Inserting Unusual Symbols(See 4.3.11).

That does it for Using MathType's Toolbar, so choose Select All (Ctrl+A) from the Edit menu and press Backspace or Delete to clear the window for the next tutorial. 4.3.4 Spacing and Alignment

In our next example we introduce some of MathType's facilities for controlling spacing and alignment in equations. We are going to create the following pair of equations:

37 MathType for Windows

Note that these equations are arranged so that their signs are vertically aligned, and they both contain a "lim sup" construction of a type that we have not used before. You can create these equations as follows:

Expanding Integrals Integral signs are normally a constant size. You can create an expanding integral by holding down the Shift key while you choose an integral template from the integrals palette.

1. Insert a definite integral template by clicking on the icon or by pressing Ctrl+I, type in the integrand (the large slot), and fill in the 0 and 1 as the limits of integration (the two small slots). You probably won't want the parentheses in the integrand to be of the "expanding" variety, so you can just type them from the keyboard, rather than using the template. Your equation should now look like this:

2. To improve the appearance of our equation, we should insert a thin space (one sixth of an em) in between the a(x) and the dx in the integrand. MathType can not do this automatically, so we provide you with a convenient way of manually entering a space of the correct size.

Parentheses Template You may prefer to use the template instead of typing ( and ). Using the template can give your document a more consistent look. The template also includes more space around it, so you may not need to add the thin space as shown here. We're trying to teach you the different ways to create equations; obviously the final choice is up to you!

The palette provides a set of five icons representing commonly used spaces, as shown in the following table.

Icon Keystroke Alt. Keystroke Description

Shift+Space Ctrl+K,0 Zero space

Ctrl+Alt+Space Ctrl+K,1 One point space

38 MathType for Windows

Ctrl+Space Ctrl+K,2 Thin space (sixth

of an em)

Ctrl+Shift+Space Ctrl+K,3 Thick space

(third of an em)

None Ctrl+K,4 Em space (quad)

Place the insertion point between the ")" and the "d" by clicking there, and insert a thin space either by choosing the icon (it's on the right in the top row of the palette) or by pressing Ctrl+Spacebar.

3. Move the insertion point out of the integrand slot, into the position shown below. You must do this for the alignment commands to work properly. Don't create the rest of the equation within the integrand slot.

Show Nesting The Show Nesting command on the View menu shows the different slots and can help you avoid making mistakes.

4. Click on the sign in the Small Bar.

5. Now we want to build the "lim sup" structure. We begin by clicking on the icon in the

Palette. This icon represents an underscript template: any characters entered in the upper slot will be full size, and those in the lower slot will be reduced to "subscript" size.

6. The insertion point is positioned in the upper slot, so you can type in limsup. MathType will use your "Function" style (probably a plain style) for these characters, and will insert a thin space between the "lim" and the "sup".

7. Move the insertion point down into the lower slot by clicking in it or by pressing the Tab key, and enter . The and symbols are very common in mathematics, so they've been added to MathType's default Small Bar. They're also available in the Symbol Palettes, of course. Following typesetting conventions (as always), MathType will not create any spacing around the symbol, since it is in a "subscript," but you can insert spaces, if you want to.

8. Press Tab to move the insertion point out of the lower slot, and type in the rest of this first equation. The speedy way to do this is to just type Ctrl+G f Ctrl+L n Tab ( a ). If you like the Ctrl+G shortcut, you may be interested to know that there are a few others that work in a similar fashion. If you press Ctrl+U, for example, the next character you type will be assigned the User 1 style that you have defined with the Define command on the Style menu. In this

39 MathType for Windows way, you can access any character in any font with just two keystrokes, even if it's not present in the Symbol Palettes.

One-Shot Shortcuts The shortcuts that affect just the next character typed are described in more detail in Keyboard Modifiers (one-shots)(See 8.5.4).

9. Press the Enter key. This will create a new line directly beneath the first equation, so now you have a "pile" consisting of two lines. It should look like this:

Selecting a Slot You can double-click in a slot to select its contents, or type Ctrl+Shift+S.

10. To save time, we're going to create the second equation by modifying a copy of the first one. Select the entire first equation by double-clicking somewhere near its sign, copy it to the clipboard, and then paste it into the new empty slot. You should now have two identical copies of the first equation, one directly beneath the other. Now just edit the lower copy to produce the second equation. To change the to a just select the and press Ctrl+G followed by y.

11. Finally, we're going to experiment with some different ways of aligning the two equations. You can center or right-justify them by using the Align Center and Align Right commands on the Format menu. Give this a try, just to see how it looks.

12. In fact, you will probably want to align these two equations so that their signs are directly above one another. To do this, we choose the Align at = command from the Format menu. It will work even though we have signs rather than = signs. You can align the equations in other ways by using alignment symbols. You simply insert an alignment symbol in each equation at the two points that you'd like to have aligned. (However, note that alignment symbols inserted into template slots will not work.) Placing an alignment symbol to the right of each of the two signs would give the same results as using the Align at = command, for instance. The alignment symbol is represented by the icon in the Symbol Palettes - it's located in the palette.

13. You may also want to adjust the line spacing, or leading, (i.e., the amount of vertical space between the two equations). You can do this by placing the insertion point somewhere in the outermost slot of the second equation (not within a template), or by selecting the second equation, and choosing the Line Spacing command from the Format menu. When you've arranged them to your liking, the equations are complete.

40 MathType for Windows

Now that we're done with these equations, it's time to choose Select All from the Edit menu and press Backspace to clear your window for the next tutorial. 4.3.5 A Simple Matrix

In our next tutorial, we illustrate MathType's powerful capabilities for laying out matrices. We will construct the following matrix equation:

The matrix is a fairly simple one, and we'll be able to create it very easily by using a matrix template. If you need more flexible formatting capabilities for matrices and tabular layouts, you should use tabs, as illustrated in Formatting with Tabs(See 4.3.10).

1. Type the first few terms of the equation, up to the second equals sign. MathType will recognize that "det" is an abbreviation for the determinant function, and will automatically set it in plain roman type, so you don't have to fiddle with it. The quick way to get a  is to press Ctrl+G followed by a letter l (lower-case L). Also, note that the I and the A represent matrices, so we have assigned them the Vector-Matrix style, which causes them to appear in bold type. The Ctrl+B shortcut will assign the Vector-Matrix style to the next character, so you can press Ctrl+B followed by I to get the I, and Ctrl+B followed by A for the A. Alternatively, you can just type all the characters first, and then select them and change their styles using the commands on the Style menu. Either way, your equation should end up looking like this:

2. Type the second = sign and insert a vertical bar template by choosing the icon. It's located in the palette.

3. Insert a 22 matrix template inside the vertical bars by choosing the icon from the palette. Your equation should now look like this:

4. The insertion point will be in the top left slot of the 22 matrix, so enter the expression - a11 there.

5. We're feeling lazy, so we're going to create the other entries in the matrix by cutting and pasting. Select the - a11 by double-clicking on it, copy it to the Clipboard, and paste it into the other three slots in the matrix. The result should be as shown below; it's not right, of course, but we're going to fix it up in a few moments.

41 MathType for Windows

Drag and Drop You can also drag the term and drop it in the other slots. Remember to hold down the Ctrl key to copy the term.

6. Next, we're going to put a little extra space between the vertical bars and the elements of the matrix. This is purely a matter of taste, so you can skip this part if you'd prefer to keep your matrix looking the way it does at present. Before we enter the spaces, we need to position the insertion point so that it's inside the vertical bars but to the left of and outside the matrix. You can do this by clicking somewhere near the position indicated by the arrow pointer in the preceding picture. Then just enter one or two thin spaces by pressing Ctrl+Spacebar. Do the same on the right-hand side of the matrix. If you choose the Show All command from the View menu, you'll be able to see your spaces. They should look like this:

7. After the brief digression in Step 6, it's now time to correct the entries in our matrix. First, delete the  from the upper right slot. The quickest way to do this is to place the insertion point to the right of it and press Backspace. Do the same with the  in the lower left slot. Notice that MathType adjusts the spacing after the minus signs to reflect the fact that they are now unary operators rather than binary operators (negation rather than subtraction).

8. Change all the subscripts in the matrix to their desired values. The "11" in the upper left slot is correct already, but we should have "12" in the upper right slot, "21" in the lower left, and "22" in the lower right. You can double-click on the existing subscripts to select them, and then type the correct values over them, just as you would in a word processor. Your equation should now look like this:

Modifying a Matrix The Matrix submenu on the Format menu contains commands for adding and deleting rows and columns.

9. The equation is now essentially complete, although there are a few more formatting options you may want to try out. First, you might want to shift the entire matrix down so that its top

42 MathType for Windows row is aligned with the rest of the equation. To do this, place the insertion point anywhere in the matrix and choose Align at Top from the Format menu. Also, it might be nice to right justify the entries in each column. To do this, place the insertion point somewhere in the matrix, choose the Change Matrix command from the Matrix submenu on the Format menu, and click on the button labeled "Right" in the dialog box.

Finally, if you object to the fact that MathType tightened the spacing after the unary minus signs, you can put the spaces back in again, though this would mean deviating from standard typesetting conventions. They should be thick spaces (one third of an em). The thick space is the middle one in the second row of the palette. If you prefer to use the keyboard, you can insert a thick space by pressing Ctrl+Shift+Space. Alternatively, since a thick space is the same width as two thin spaces, you can get the same results by pressing Ctrl+Space twice.

If you elected to make all of the modifications suggested in this step, your equation should look something like the picture below.

If you're going on to the next tutorial, press Ctrl+A to select all, then press Backspace or Delete to clear your screen. 4.3.6 Equation Numbering in Microsoft Word

This tutorial describes how to use the MathType commands for numbering equations in Microsoft Word documents. Although Word has its own method for numbering equations (captions), Word places captions above or below an item, not to the side, which is typically how equations are numbered. Using the MathType toolbar that's added to Word, you can enter inline, display and numbered display equations with just one click.

We're going to create the following portion of a document to illustrate the equation numbering commands.

However, we're going to create it in a slightly unrealistic sequence, in order to illustrate the power and flexibility of the numbering commands.

43 MathType for Windows

1. Run Microsoft Word and create a new document.

2. Enter the following text: We now have two basic equations:

3. Click on the button on Word's MathType toolbar, or choose the Insert Right-Numbered Display Equation command on Word's MathType menu or tab.

4. A dialog will appear asking if you want to create a new chapter/section break at the start of this document. We'll explain the meaning of this later in the tutorial. For now, just click OK.

Word Styles Used The line containing the equation is formatted with Word's MTDisplayEquation style, which you can modify to affect all display equations in your document.

5. In the MathType window that opens, enter the following equation:

then close the MathType window. In your Word document, notice that the equation is centered and the equation number is aligned with the right margin.

6. Repeat step 3 and insert the following equation into your Word document:

7. Enter the following text at the start of the next line: Subtracting

8. Now let's insert a reference to the second display equation. Click the button on the MathType toolbar or choose the Insert Equation Reference command on Word's MathType menu or tab. The Insert Equation Reference dialog will appear, displaying brief instructions about inserting an equation number reference. Once you are familiar with the process you can click the "Don't show me again" box. For now, click OK, then double-click on the equation number (1.2). You'll see that the number (1.2) is inserted into your sentence.

Equation References • You can jump to an equation in your document quickly by double-clicking on any of its references. Then press Shift+F5 to jump back to the reference. • In large documents try splitting your window into two panes (search for split in Word's Help). Insert the references in one pane and scroll and double-click on the equation numbers in the other. • You can place equation number references in footnotes and endnotes.

44 MathType for Windows

9. Type from and then enter a reference to equation (1.1) using the method described in step 8. You may want to enter a space before and after the reference.

10. Then type gives and insert the following numbered display equation:

11. At the start of the following line, type Using and insert a reference to equation (1.3). Complete the line by typing we can show that

12. Click the button on Word's MathType toolbar, or choose the Insert Inline Equation command on the MathType menu, and insert the following equation:

Notice how this equation is inserted in the line of text (hence the name inline equation). Word also aligns the equation with the baseline of the text. Your document should now look like this:

Now we'll insert another equation in the middle of this example to demonstrate automatic renumbering.

13. Place the insertion point before the word Subtracting, and enter the following text: Adding these two together, we obtain

14. Insert this numbered display equation:

You'll see that the new equation is numbered (1.3), and the following equation number and its reference have been renumbered to (1.4). Your document should now look like the example at the start of this tutorial.

Equation Numbers You can insert just an equation number using the Insert Equation Number command.

If Updating Is Slow If updating takes too long, uncheck "Update equation numbers automatically" in the Format Equation Numbers dialog. Then use the Update Equation Numbers command to manually update the numbers.

45 MathType for Windows

Whenever you insert an equation number or an equation reference, all numbers in the document are updated. However, if you move or delete an equation number, you must use the Update Equation Numbers command on the MathType menu to regenerate the number sequence. Also, be aware that deleting an equation number does not automatically delete any of its references; you'll have to do this yourself. You can find them by using the Update Equation Numbers command, which will cause Word to display an error message in place of each reference. You can then delete them.

Equation Number Formats

You can also control the format of the equation numbers.

Whole Document To change the format of existing equation numbers you must check the Whole Document checkbox. Otherwise you're only setting the format for the next number(s) you insert.

15. Choose the Format Equation Numbers command on the MathType menu (there's no toolbar button for this command). Check the Whole Document checkbox (to change the existing numbers) and change the Enclosure option to <> (angle brackets). The preview shows you the result of your settings. Click OK, and you'll see the equation numbers and references change to the new format. You may want to experiment with some of the settings - there are many possible combinations.

Chapter/Section Breaks

Section Numbers If you don't want section numbers included, you can turn them off in the Format Equation Numbers dialog.

The default equation number format includes a section number and an equation number, e.g., (1.1). You can also include a chapter number if needed. The chapter and section numbers are determined by the nearest preceding Chapter/Section Break in your document. You insert and modify these breaks using commands on the MathType menu. We already inserted one at the start of this document as part of inserting the first equation number. Now we'll change its value.

Show Chapter/Section Breaks You can show and hide chapter/section breaks by clicking on the button in Word's toolbar or Home tab. This shows and hides the MTEquationSection style.

16. Choose the Modify Chapter/Section Break command on the MathType menu. The location of the section break will be highlighted and the Modify Chapter/Section Break dialog will open.

46 MathType for Windows

Let's assume we're working on Section 2 of a book, so we want the section number to be 2 and the equation number to be 1. Choose the "Section number:" button and enter 2. The "Next" option can be useful if your document contains several sections and you want them numbered sequentially. (Remember that there's no link between Word's sections and MathType's chapter/section breaks. It's up to you to associate them by placing the breaks in the appropriate places in your document). Now click OK. The chapter/section break will be hidden, and the equation numbers in the document will all start with 2.

If you've followed these steps your document should look something like this:

MathType's equation numbering commands can also support three levels of numbering, e.g., chapter, section, and equation numbers. You can also control the format of the numbers and create your own custom formats. The next tutorial shows you how to do this; we'll use the document we created in this tutorial so don't delete it! 4.3.7 Advanced Equation Numbering in Microsoft Word

The simple equation numbering example shown in the previous tutorial is sufficient for many documents, but sometimes you may need to create a third level of numbers. For example your document may require chapter, section, and equation numbers. Or you may find that the built- in number formats don't match your needs and you'd like to create a custom number format. This tutorial shows you how to accomplish both tasks.

1. Open the document you created in the previous tutorial.

2. Open the Format Equation Numbers dialog by choosing the Format Equation Numbers command on the MathType menu.

47 MathType for Windows

3. The settings should appear as shown above. The top group of items controls the number format. We want to add a chapter number, so check the "Chapter Number" checkbox. Notice how the preview changes to <1.1.1>.

4. Check the "Whole document" radio button so the changes we make will be applied to existing equation numbers. Then click OK.

You'll notice that the document has changed, and the equation numbers now read <1.2.1>, <1.2.2> etc. This is because the chapter/section break at the start of the document sets the chapter number to 1. This was added to the document when we inserted the first equation number. Let's pretend we want to set this to be Chapter 2.

5. Choose the Modify Chapter/Section Break command on the MathType menu, and the following dialog will open. In Word 2007-2013, this is the Modify Break command in the Chapters & Sections dropdown list. You'll see that the break itself has also been made visible in the Word document.

48 MathType for Windows

6. Change the Chapter number value to 2 and click OK. The numbers in the document should now read <2.2.1>, <2.2.2> etc.

Now let's try changing the format of the numbers more dramatically. We'll set the format so that the numbers read Equation 2.2.1, Equation 2.2.2 etc.

7. Choose the Format Equation Numbers command on the MathType menu. Select the Advanced Format radio button, and enter Equation #C1.#S1.#E1 in the edit box. You'll see how the Preview changes.

8. Check the "Whole document" checkbox, and click OK. The equation numbers in the document should be updated.

You can experiment with different custom formats in this manner. The 'language' used for the formats is very simple, all characters are used literally except for the constructs #Cx, #Sx, and #Ex, where x indicates the numeric representation and can be one of 1, a, A, i, I.

A fast way of learning how to control the formatting is to select the Simple Format button, and then change the various options. The Advanced Format text is still visible, and it updates every time you make a change to the built-in formats. Full details are in the Help for this dialog. 4.3.8 Setting Up a Microsoft Word 2007-2013 Document

When creating a Microsoft Word document containing equations there are several considerations you should keep in mind. You'll probably want the body text to match the equations in terms of fonts and sizes, and you'll typically want all equations in the document to use consistent formatting, i.e. the same font and size settings, as well as any other special settings you may have made in MathType.

This tutorial shows you how to achieve these goals, and how to update the document's equations if you decide to change your fonts and/or sizes.

Word's Styles If you're not familiar with Word's styles we

49 MathType for Windows

urge you to take a few minutes to learn how to use them. In Word's Help Contents, search for styles.

Although Word and MathType allow you to select text and change its font and size directly, we strongly recommend that you make use of styles instead. Both programs use this approach because it makes modifying the look of a document or equation very easy. You simply change the definition of a style (e.g., from Times New Roman to Arial, or from 12 pt plain to 10 pt italic), and your document or equation is immediately reformatted with the new settings.

Let's assume you're required to produce a document where the body font is 10 pt Times New Roman. The first step is to define MathType's settings to match the Word document.

1. In MathType, open the Define Styles(See 8.4.6) dialog and set the main font to Times New Roman using either the Simple or Advanced pane. Make sure the "Use for new equations" box is checked, and click OK.

Factory Settings Click "Factory settings" to reset the values.

2. Open the Define Sizes(See 8.4.4) dialog and set the Full size to 10 pt. As the other dimensions are by default expressed as percentages, MathType will calculate them for you. Again, check the "Use for new equations" option, and click OK.

Equation Preferences The definitions of all the styles, sizes, and spacing used in an equation are referred to collectively as "equation preferences". See Equation Preferences sub-menu(See 8.3.11) for more details.

3. Back in Word, choose the Equation Preferences command in the Format group on the MathType tab. Make sure the "MathType's 'New Equation' preferences" option is selected. This means that whenever you create a new equation using the commands on the Insert Equations group, the settings MathType is currently set to use for new equations are the ones that will be used. Click OK to close this dialog.

Note: you may not always want to rely on MathType's 'New Equation' preferences. If you tend to change MathType's size and style definitions quite often, you may want to create a MathType preference file, and then choose this file in the Set Equation Preferences dialog. This will copy the file's preferences into your Word document, so that no matter what changes you make to MathType, equations created in your

50 MathType for Windows

document will always use these preferences.

4. Now we'll quickly create a Word style for the body of the document. Click the Dialog Box Launcher in the lower right-hand corner of the Styles group on the Home tab. In the lower left-hand corner of the Styles dialog, click New Style . In the Create New Style from

Formatting dialog, name the new style "body". You'll probably base it on Word's built-in Normal style. Set the new style's font to Times New Roman 10 pt by making the appropriate selections in the Formatting section of the dialog. Don't click OK yet.

5. Click on the Format button in the lower left-hand corner of the dialog. Choose Paragraph. On the dialog's Indents and Spacing tab, change the Line Spacing option to Single. Click OK to close the dialog.

6. Click OK to close the New Style dialog, and then click the X to close the Style dialog.

You've now configured Word and MathType to use the same font and size definitions, which will make equations closely match the look of the rest of the document. Go ahead and enter a line or two of text and insert a simple equation.

Now let's suppose that, as so frequently happens, you have to change the document's font to Garamond. To keep this example simple we won't change the point size, but you'd follow the same steps if this were the case.

These are the changes we need to make: o Modify Word's "body" style to use Garamond instead of Times New Roman. o Modify MathType's styles to use Garamond instead of Times New Roman. o Update the existing equations in the document to use the new font.

The first two steps are very similar to how we originally created the styles and added them to the Word document, so we won't go through them in detail. The first step involves using Word's Style dialog (right-click on Body in the Styles group, and choose Modify), the second step requires MathType's Define Styles dialog.

The third step involves the Format Equations command on the Ribbon's MathType tab.

7. Choose the Format Equations command, and the Format Equations dialog will appear. This dialog allows you to reformat the equations in your document, and provides you with several ways to determine the equation preferences that are applied. The choices are:

o The equation preferences already stored in this document. o MathType's current equation preferences for new equations. o The equation preferences contained in a MathType equation you've copied to the clipboard. o The equation preferences contained in a MathType preference file.

For this example click the "MathType's 'New Equation' preferences" button. You can click Preview to get a list of the actual preferences.

51 MathType for Windows

TIP See Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.1) for more details on the other options.

8. Click OK and the formatting process will start. This can take anywhere from a few seconds to several minutes depending on the speed of your computer and the number of equations in your document. The command's progress is shown in Word's status bar. When the operation has finished, check that the equations were updated. 4.3.9 Setting Up a Microsoft Word 2002-2003 Document

This tutorial shows you how to achieve these goals, and how to update the document's equations if you decide to change your fonts and/or sizes.

Word's Styles If you're not familiar with Word's styles we urge you to take a few minutes to learn how to use them. In Word's Help Contents, search for styles.

Let's assume you're required to produce a document where the body font is 10 pt Times New Roman. The first step is to define MathType's settings to match the Word document.

Factory Settings Click "Factory settings" to reset the values.

52 MathType for Windows

3. Back in Word, choose the Set Equation Preferences command on the MathType menu. Make sure the "MathType's 'New Equation' preferences" option is selected. This means that whenever you create a new equation using the commands on the MathType menu or MathType toolbar, the settings MathType is currently set to use for new equations are the ones that will be used. Click OK to close this dialog.

4. Now we'll quickly create a Word style for the body of the document. Choose the Style command on Word's Format menu, click New and name the new style "body". You'll probably base it on Word's built-in normal style. Set the new style's font to Times New Roman 10 pt by clicking on the Format button and choosing Font. Click OK to close the Font dialog.

Line Spacing

For a more detailed discussion of this issue see Support for Microsoft Word(See 6.2.2.1).

5. Click on the Format button again and this time choose Paragraph. In the dialog's Indents and Spacing page, change the Line Spacing option to Single. Click OK to close the dialog.

6. Click OK to close the New Style dialog, and then click Apply to close the Style dialog.

53 MathType for Windows

The first two steps are very similar to how we originally created the styles and added them to the Word document, so we won't go through them in detail. The first step involves using Word's Style dialog, the second step requires MathType's Define Styles dialog.

The third step involves the Format Equations command on the MathType menu.

TIP See Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.1) for more details on the other options.

For this example click the "MathType's 'New Equations' preferences" button. You can click Preview to get a list of the actual preferences.

In this example we show you how MathType's system of tabs provides extra flexibility for formatting equations. We're going to create the equation:

and then format it several different ways. We proceed as follows:

1. Create the expression on the left-hand side of the equals sign. As you know by now, you can choose the template or press Ctrl+L to attach the subscript to the c.

2. Choose the template from the palette to insert an expanding left brace. You should now have the following:

54 MathType for Windows

3. Enter the top expression in the brace, up to and including the x, and then press Ctrl+Tab (press the Tab key while holding down the Ctrl key). If you press the Tab key alone, this will move the insertion point, rather than insert a tab character.

Choosing Styles Another way to choose a style is to right- click in the Style panel of the status bar and select the style from the context menu that appears.

4. Choose the Text style from the Style menu and type when n is even. While you're using the Text style, the spacebar is active and you have to type spaces, as you would in a word processor. Choose Show All from the View menu, if it's not already checked, so that you can see your tab character, which is displayed as a small diamond. Also, choose Ruler from the View menu if it's not already checked. Your equation should look like this:

Note that the tab character causes the phrase "when n is even" to line up underneath the first default tab stop to the right of the x. The default tab stops (indicated by small inverted T's along the ruler scale) are positioned at half-inch intervals starting at the left-hand side of the current slot. Since we are currently within the main slot of the template, the half-inch intervals are measured from the left edge of this slot, i.e. just to the left of .

Ruler Units Default units for ruler graduations are inches. If you prefer to work in centimeters, points, or picas, double-click the ruler pane to bring up the Ruler Units dialog(See 8.4.23). Make your choice of ruler units and click OK.

5. Press Enter to start a new line underneath the first one, and type in its contents. You should switch back to the Math style to enter 14.3x. Insert a tab character (Ctrl+Tab) after the x, as in the first line. Now switch back to Text again to type when n is odd. This should give you:

55 MathType for Windows

Again, the text phrase aligns with the first default tab stop to the right of the x. Note that you have created a two-line pile within the template, and that each pile in MathType has its own tab stops.

Changing Styles Remember you can also use the keyboard shortcuts listed on the Style menu, or right- click on the Status Bar's Style panel.

6. Select the n in the first line and choose Math from the Style menu. This makes MathType interpret the n as a mathematical quantity, i.e. a variable, and will therefore apply the Variable style (typically italic). Do the same to the n in the second line.

7. Place the insertion point somewhere within one of the two lines on the right-hand side of the equation, click on the tab well, and then click on the tab stop pane of the ruler at about the 1½ inch mark to set a left tab stop. This will remove all default tab stops to the left of the new tab stop. Your equation should now be aligned as shown below:

If this is how we want the equation formatted, then our work is finished. However, there are several other options that are worth exploring.

8. First, we're going to align the two x's. Insert a tab character (Ctrl+Tab) at the start of each of the two lines. This will cause each line to be shifted so that its left-hand side aligns with the left tab stop. The text phrase in each line, since it is separated by another tab character, will align with the first available default tab stop to the right of the x.

9. Next, click on the tab well, and then click on the ruler just to the left of the previous tab stop. This should produce the following results:

You can now change the formatting easily by just dragging the tab stops around on the Tab Well pane of the ruler.

10. Next, we're going to align the two decimal points. To prepare for this, first remove the tab by dragging it downwards away from the ruler and then releasing the mouse button. Next, click on the tab well, and then click on the ruler at around the one inch mark to set a decimal tab stop. Your equation should end up looking like this:

56 MathType for Windows

That's it for this tutorial, so delete your equation to be ready for the next tutorial. 4.3.11 Inserting Unusual Symbols

In this tutorial, you'll learn how to use MathType's Insert Symbol dialog to locate and use symbols that are not readily available in the built-in palettes. Suppose, for example, that you are going to be writing a document about some newly-invented operations on sets that are analogous to conventional union and intersection. You will want to find symbols to represent your new set operations, and it would be nice if these were similar to the conventional  and  symbols. Your first attempt might be to use bold versions of the conventional symbols to represent your new operations, like this:

Unfortunately, the bold symbols look too much like the regular ones, so we'll try to find a better solution.

1. Create the equations as shown above.

2. From MathType's Edit menu, choose Insert Symbol. The following dialog will appear:

57 MathType for Windows

This dialog is somewhat similar to the one in Microsoft Word, and to the Windows Character Map accessory, which you may already know how to use.

Getting Detailed Help To get detailed information about the Insert Symbol dialog(See 8.4.13), click on the Help button near its upper right-hand corner.

You can use the Insert Symbol dialog to browse all the fonts available on your computer, and investigate MathType's knowledge of them. Specifically, you can:

 Insert a specific character or mathematical symbol into your equation.  Add a frequently used symbol to the toolbar.  Add a keyboard shortcut for a frequently used symbol.  Find a symbol by matching words in its description.

3. The first place to look for usable symbols is the Symbol font, so select Symbol from the list of fonts near the top of the Insert Symbol dialog. A quick way to locate a font is to click on the list and then type the first letter or two of the font's name. Once the desired font is selected you can scroll through the large grid of characters in the center of the dialog, looking for likely prospects.

Choosing Fonts A quick way is to click in the list and then type the first letter of the name. You can also use the scroll bar in the list to move around quickly.

Larger Symbol Display To enlarge the characters in the Insert Symbol dialog, choose Workspace Preferences from MathType's Preferences menu, and set Toolbar size to Medium or Large.

4. You might also look in the Euclid Symbol and Wingdings fonts. Note that the Insert Symbol dialog tells you that Symbol and Euclid Symbol have the same "encoding" (arrangement of characters). So, if you don't find the characters you need in one of these two fonts, you won't find them in the other, either.

5. The Insert Symbol dialog actually provides a more intelligent way to search for the characters you need, rather just browsing through fonts. In the View by field, choose Description. Click on the New Search button, type the word union, and choose OK. The grid of characters will now show you several union-like symbols.

6. In the Insert Symbol dialog, uncheck "Show one of each" to see all the characters on your computer that MathType knows about, and which have the word "union" in their names. Depending on which fonts you have installed, there may be a few dozen such characters. If

58 MathType for Windows you are overwhelmed by the vast array of characters shown, click on "Show one of each" to reduce the number. This causes the dialog to display only one character (from the first font that contains it) for each description matched by the search criteria.

7. Click on a few of the promising-looking union characters, to see what MathType can tell you about them. Among other things, MathType will give you a description of the character, the font in which it was found, and the corresponding keystroke.

8. One of the characters you should see is a double union symbol from the Euclid Math Two font. Let's assume that we want to use this, provided we can find a corresponding symbol for intersection.

9. Using the techniques outlined above, search for symbols with "intersection" in their names. You should find a double intersection symbol , again in the Euclid Math Two font.

10. In the "View by" list choose Font, and select Euclid Math Two from the list of fonts near the top of the Insert Symbol dialog. Scroll down to the bottom of the character grid until you see the and symbols. Nearby in the character grid, you will see the square-shaped union and intersection symbols, and . Our search did not find these because their names are derived from the Unicode standard, which calls them "square cup" and "square cap" respectively.

Keyboard Shortcuts The Insert Symbol dialog allows you to assign a keyboard shortcut to any character in any font.

11. You can click on Insert to insert symbols directly from the Insert Symbol dialog. However, if you're going to be using them repeatedly, you'll want to place them on one of MathType's bars for easier access. Press (and hold down) the Alt key and drag the character from the grid in the Insert Symbol dialog to the Small Bar. Then do the same for the symbol. See Using MathType's Toolbar(See 4.3.3) for more information about working with MathType's toolbars.

12. Edit your equations to use the new symbols:

MathType knows all about the Euclid Math Two font, so it realizes that the and symbols are binary operators, just like  and  and it puts the correct spacing around them automatically. If you use characters from more obscure fonts, you'll have to take a few extra steps to get this automatic spacing to work. To learn more about MathType's knowledge of fonts, and how you can extend it, see Adding to MathType's Font and Character Knowledge(See 5.6.6).

59 MathType for Windows

4.3.12 Creating Web Pages with Microsoft Word

The Publish to MathPage command provides the easiest way to convert Microsoft Word documents containing equations into web pages. It's based on Word's Save as Web Page command, but solves the problems this command has handling equations. Creating Web Pages with MathPage(See 6.1.2.14) contains more details on the background behind this process; this tutorial will show you how easy it is to produce great-looking technical web pages.

1. Open Microsoft Word and create a new document containing the following:

Create the equations using Insert Inline Equation and Insert Right-Numbered Display Equation. Create the reference using Insert Equation Reference. Refer to Spacing and Alignment(See 4.3.4) if you don't remember how to align the two lines of the display equation.

Save As Web Page vs. Exporting or Publishing Word's Save as Web Page command saves the current document as a web page and keeps it open for editing. You have a document that can be viewed in a Web browser and opened in Word. MathPage exports or publishes a web page, which means that you end up with two documents; the original Word document, and the web page itself (which is not editable in Word).

2. Save the Word document, naming it MathPage Tutorial. Then choose Publish to

MathPage on the MathType menu (you can also click on the button on the MathType toolbar) or the MathType tab. The following dialog will appear:

60 MathType for Windows

The Title may have already been filled in with the document's Title property. You can modify this or add a title if you wish; the text will be displayed in the browser window's title bar, and saved in the Word document's Title property.

3. Make sure the other settings in the dialog are as shown above. If you and your audience aren't using Internet Explorer 6 or newer, click the "All browsers" radio button.

4. Click OK. You'll notice some activity on the screen, and a progress dialog that indicates the status of the exporting process. It shouldn't take more than a few seconds for a small document like this.

Your default browser will open, displaying a page which should look almost identical to your original Word document. If it didn't open, or you didn't have this option checked, start your browser and open the file you just generated (most browsers have an Open command for this purpose).

Discovering MathZoom You may want to add a note to your website explaining how MathZoom works so your audience will know to click on the equations to zoom them.

5. In your browser, notice how the inline equations are perfectly aligned with the surrounding text. Now let's try the MathZoom feature. Move the mouse pointer over one of the equations and click. You'll see a magnified version of the equation appear. This allows you to clearly see small items such as subscripts, superscripts and embellishments, even when the text is small. You can zoom in on as many equations as you like. Click again on an equation to revert back to

61 MathType for Windows its normal size. You can close all zoomed equations by holding down the Shift key and clicking in one of the zoomed equations.

This feature is controlled by the MathZoom checkbox in the MathPage dialog. You may want to disable it for documents where the zoom feature isn't useful, for example when the equations are already large. Also, documents containing a large number (>100) of equations may download slightly faster with MathZoom turned off. Otherwise, we suggest you always leave MathZoom on.

6. Print the web page using the browser's Print command. Notice how nicely the equations appear, and that they match the quality of the document's text. Even though MathPage is using GIF images the equations print with laser printer quality.

7. If you're using Internet Explorer, click and drag one of the equations to a MathType window. A new MathType window opens containing the equation. This great feature means that you and people who view your pages can make use of the equations without having to re-create them.

Copying Equations The ability to drag an equation to MathType can be very useful, but you cannot use it to modify the web page! MathPage generates multiple versions of each equation, and you'd have to edit all of them identically for this to work. To modify the equations you should edit the original Word document and run the MathPage command again.

You'll see that the equation number and reference display properly too. Equation number references also act as hyperlinks to the equation number they reference, although you'll need a larger document to see this in action.

If you want to experiment some more, you can modify the Word document and run the Publish to MathPage command again. Although it's possible to directly edit the web page, we strongly recommend that you perform your editing in Word. The generated web page contains a lot of script blocks and if they're incorrectly modified, the page may not display properly in a browser. Try adding some more equations to the text, and perhaps some equation number references. You could also try adding a table to see how it appears in a web page; in general tables should be used for alignment and layout rather than using tabs or columns.

For more information about MathPage see Creating Web Pages with MathPage(See 6.1.2.14) and the MathType website at www.dessci.com . 4.3.13 Creating Web Pages with GIF Files

Publish to MathPage The easiest way to create technical web

62 MathType for Windows

pages is to use MathType's Publish to MathPage command in Word. See Creating web pages with Microsoft Word(See 4.3.12) and Creating web pages with MathPage(See 6.1.2.14) for more information.

This tutorial teaches you another way to create web pages containing equations. This approach should be used when converting a Word document into a web page using MathPage is not appropriate. It involves creating GIF equation files and inserting them into your pages. As MathType can output GIF files, it is an excellent tool for this purpose. MathType will even generate the HTML (HyperText Markup Language - the basic language of the Web) needed to link your web page to the newly generated MathType GIF file. MathType-generated GIF files have several advantages over GIF files produced in other ways:

 They can be anti-aliased to produce better-looking smoothed edges.  They are small (typically being monochrome), allowing for faster downloads.  They can be edited at a later date in MathType.  People can save the GIF file from the web page, open it with MathType and then place it into other documents in any of MathType's supported formats including WMF, EPS, LaTeX, MathML (and PICT on Macintosh computers).

Inserting a GIF File Into a Document

1. Run MathType and your HTML editing program.

2. In MathType, choose Web and GIF Preferences from the Preferences menu. This dialog contains options for setting the GIF file's resolution (dots per inch), the image's background, and the HTML code to generate when the GIF file is saved. For now, check the "Copy HTML/text to clipboard on GIF file save" item.

3. Create a simple equation in MathType and choose Save As on the File Menu.

4. Select GIF File Format, type in the file name you desire, and save the equation in the same folder as your HTML document. MathType will generate HTML code for this equation and copy it to the clipboard.

5. Bring your HTML document to the front.

6. Place the insertion point where you want the equation to be inserted. If you are using a text editor you can paste the HTML into your document. If you are using a WYSIWYG HTML editor you will have to use its method for inserting plain HTML code (look for an "Insert HTML" or "View Source" command).

7. Save your HTML document and open it in your Web browser. You will see the equation embedded in your web page.

You can anti-alias MathType equations to improve their appearance in web pages. This technique smooths their edges and makes them look less jagged.

8. Switch back to MathType, open the Web and GIF Preferences dialog, check "Smooth edges (anti-aliasing)" and then close the dialog.

63 MathType for Windows

Background Color The Web and GIF Preferences dialog lets you control the background color of the equation, including making it transparent.

9. Save the MathType equation, then switch back to your browser and refresh the current page. You'll see the appearance of the equation change. Anti-aliasing works better for some equations than others (in general it's better on large equations than small ones).

The default HTML code generated by MathType includes the GIF file name and its dimensions, and is sufficient for most cases. You can modify this code in the Web and GIF Preferences dialog; consult this dialog's Help for more details.

Setting GIF Resolution You can set the resolution of GIF files in the Web and GIF Preferences dialog.

Saving an equation as a screen-resolution GIF image provides for fast downloads, but it will not print with laser printer quality. For better printing, create the GIF at a higher resolution, at the cost of increased download time. For most uses 300 dpi is sufficient; higher resolutions aren't noticeably better unless you're printing on a very high-resolution device.

To use a high-resolution GIF, first generate it at a lower resolution, either 96 or 120 dpi. Paste the HTML that MathType generates into your document, this contains the appropriate screen size for the equation in the browser. Now re-save the same file, using the same name but at a higher resolution. When displayed on the screen the browser will scale down the GIF. When printed, it will use the full resolution of the GIF. The screen display may not be as clean as the original low-resolution GIF, as the scaling can introduce jagged edges. You may need to experiment with a few different resolutions.

Getting an equation to align with the baseline of the surrounding text can be an art unto itself. It typically involves using Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) and manual formatting. As standards evolve and Web browsers constantly change, it's difficult to recommend a solution that works in all situations. MathML is a standard for expressing math in web pages. MathType can generate MathML - see Working with TeX, LaTeX, & MathML(See 4.3.15) for more details. Check the MathType website at www.dessci.com for our latest recommendations on this subject. 4.3.14 Customizing the Keyboard

Watch the Status Bar As you move the mouse over items in the palettes, MathType's status bar -- that's the very bottom of the MathType window -- displays a brief description of the current

64 MathType for Windows

item, including its keyboard shortcut if one has been defined.

MathType has built-in keyboard shortcuts for many of its commands, and the most commonly- used symbols and templates. However, you can change any of MathType's shortcuts, and you can also assign your own shortcuts for any items you place on the toolbar. See Keyboard Shortcuts(See 8.5) for a complete list of the built-in shortcuts.

We'll start by defining a shortcut for a template that doesn't already have one.

1. Let's assume that you have to create several equations that include the template (open brackets). MathType does not define a shortcut for this template. To assign one, first choose the Customize Keyboard command on the Preferences menu.

2. The Customize Keyboard dialog will appear. The panel titled Command: contains a hierarchical list of all the MathType commands that can be assigned keyboard shortcuts. We want to assign one to a toolbar item, so click on the + next to the Toolbar Commands category. An indented list will appear underneath Toolbar Commands. Click on the + next to Templates in this list, and then on the + next to Fence Templates.

3. Select the Open Brackets item (you may have to scroll the list down a little for this item to appear). The template will appear in the panel next to the description so you can confirm you've selected the correct template.

4. Click in the edit box labeled "Enter new shortcut key(s)".

5. Type Ctrl+T, followed by [. Notice that a message appears below the box indicating that this shortcut is already assigned to the Left Bracket command. If we were to assign this combination to the Open Brackets template, it would be removed from the Left Bracket command. When assigning new shortcuts always check that you don't accidentally overwrite an existing shortcut.

Multiple Shortcuts You can assign more than one shortcut for the same command if you desire.

6. Press backspace once, and then type Alt+[. This time there's no current assignment. Now click the Assign button, and you'll see the shortcut appear in the Current Keys list, as well as being appended to the Open Brackets item in the list of commands.

7. Click Close to close the dialog, then type Ctrl+T followed by Alt+[. You'll see the template appear in the equation window.

Customize Keyboard The Customize Keyboard dialog lets you reset a command's shortcut to its default setting by selecting it and clicking Reset Selection. Click Reset All to reset every

65 MathType for Windows

command's shortcuts back to their original settings.

Since there are so many commands available in MathType, both one-key and two-key shortcuts are supported. MathType defines shortcuts for many templates using the form Ctrl+T followed by another character, which is why we used this particular combination. Of course, you're free to define your own schemes as you see fit.

Two-key shortcuts When MathType displays a two-key shortcut, it will be in the form of the first key, a comma, the second key. For the shortcut created in Step 7 above, we'd show that as Ctrl+T, Alt+[. Other common two- key shortcuts are Greek letters: Ctrl+G, A for a lower-case alpha, for example, or Ctrl+G, Shift+S for a capital Sigma. From the time you release the first key or key combination, you have four seconds to press the second key or key combination.

Assigning a Shortcut to a Toolbar Expression

8. Make sure the Small Tabbed Bar is visible and click on the Algebra tab. We're going to assign a shortcut to the expression, which should be the last item in the bar unless you've modified the contents.

9. Right-click the item and choose the Properties command from the context menu that appears. In the Expression Properties dialog that opens you'll see the same keyboard shortcut items we saw in the Customize Keyboard dialog.

10. Enter the shortcut Alt+R for this expression and close the dialog.

11. Type Alt+R, and will be inserted into the equation window.

We could have assigned a shortcut for this expression using the Customize Keyboard dialog, but locating the command would have involved clicking on Toolbar Commands, Tabs, Tab 1, Small Bar, Expression 14. Right-clicking the expression directly is a lot faster! 4.3.15 Working with TeX, LaTeX, & MathML

This tutorial teaches you how to convert MathType equations into textual markup languages, such as TeX, LaTeX, and MathML. Our main focus will be on LaTeX, but techniques for other languages are very similar.

In creating your LaTeX document, we assume you will be running MathType at the same time as your usual TeX system.

Suppose you want to create the following paragraph in your LaTeX document:

66 MathType for Windows

The steps are as follows:

1. Type In the quadratic formula in your text editor.

2. Run MathType by choosing it from the Start menu or Programs menu.

3. From MathType's Preferences menu, choose Cut and Copy Preferences. In the dialog that appears, set the options as shown below, and then choose OK.

4. Create the quadratic formula in MathType.

5. From MathType's Edit menu, choose Select All and then Copy.

6. Switch back to your text editor, and choose Paste. This will insert the following text into your document:

\[ x = \frac{{ - b\pm \sqrt {b^{2} - 4ac} }}{{2a}} \]

If you are familiar with LaTeX , you will recognize this as the LaTeX source code for the quadratic formula.

7. Continue typing the discriminant, and then switch back to MathType.

8. Create the discriminant term .

9. In MathType's Format menu, choose Inline Equation. This makes MathType generate the appropriate LaTeX code for an inline equation.

67 MathType for Windows

10. Copy the equation and paste it into your text document, and then type is the most important term. Your document should now look something like this

In the quadratic formula

x = \frac{{ - b\pm \sqrt {b^{2} - 4ac} }}{{2a}}

the discriminant $ {b^{2} - 4ac} $ is the most important term.

Translator Options

Converting Equations If you want MathType's Convert Equations command in Word to work with your equations, you will have better results if you turn on the "Include MathType data in translation" and "Include translator name in translation" options.

In many situations it is useful to be able to transfer old equations from a TeX document back into MathType for editing or reuse. This is generally possible, whether the equations were originally created in MathType or not. However, if you are creating TeX equations with MathType and there's a chance you or someone else may need to translate them back into MathType in the future, it's helpful to be familiar with the translator options.

To understand the approach, choose Cut and Copy Preferences from MathType's Preferences menu, and check the box labeled "Include MathType data in translation". Now create the quadratic formula again and copy & paste it into your text document. This time, the resulting text will be

% MathType!MTEF!2!1!+- % feaaguart1ev2aaatCvAUfeBSjuyZL2yd9gzLbvyNv2CaerbuLwBLn % hiov2DGi1BTfMBaeXatLxBI9gBaerbd9wDYLwzYbItLDharqqtubsr % 4rNCHbGeaGqiVu0Je9sqqrpepC0xbbL8F4rqqrFfpeea0xe9Lq-Jc9 % vqaqpepm0xbba9pwe9Q8fs0-yqaqpepae9pg0FirpepeKkFr0xfr-x % fr-xb9adbaqaaeGaciGaaiaabeqaamaabaabaaGcbaGaamiEaiabg2 % da9maalaaabaGaeyOeI0IaamOyaiabgglaXoaakaaabaGaamOyamaa % CaaaleqabaGaaGOmaaaakiabgkHiTiaaisdacaWGHbGaam4yaaWcbe % aaaOqaaiaaikdacaWGHbaaaaaa!42E1! \[x = \frac{{ - b \pm \sqrt {{b^2} - 4ac} }}{{2a}}\]

The first nine lines of text (the ones starting with a % sign) are a TeX comment containing MathType's own private representation of your equation. You must select this comment when you paste it back into MathType so it will be converted exactly back into a normal MathType equation. If you change the comment in any way, the transfer back to MathType will not work.

68 MathType for Windows

TeX comments are ignored during the typesetting process, so they will have no effect on your final output.

Note that if you copy only the TeX code and paste it into MathType (without the MathType data), the equation will normally appear just fine. But let's say you copied this equation from a Word document to translate into TeX, and now you want to paste it back into MathType to use in PowerPoint. MathType allows many adjustments to the appearance of the equation that aren't carried over to the TeX translation. If you had made adjustments to the color of the equation, the font face, the font size, or some spacing adjustments, these will not appear in the TeX code, but they will be retained in the MathType code. Therefore, keeping the MathType code with the equation ensures you will be able to paste the equation back into MathType exactly as it was when you originally created it.

MathType's Cut and Copy Preferences dialog also provides the "Include translator name in translation" option, which helps to delineate and identify equations in your documents. This might be useful if you want to write programs that search your TeX source files looking for equations and processing them in some way.

Other Translators

MathType includes translators for several dialects of TeX (Plain TeX, AMS-TeX, LaTeX, and AMS-LaTeX). These dialects correspond to various packages of TeX macros, which you must load before you typeset your document. For example, to typeset AMS-LaTeX code, you must include the commands \documentclass{amsart} or \usepackage{amsmath}, or some equivalent somewhere in the preamble of your document. Please consult your TeX or LaTeX documentation for more details.

Wikipedia and many other blogs, wikis, and websites represent math in a language called Texvc, which is essentially a subset of TeX math. MathType includes a Texvc translator tuned for use with Wikipedia, and a second generic Texvc translator that works with many other sites that use TeX. Because Texvc is somewhat simpler than other TeX dialects, one of these translators is often a good choice if you will be editing the equation further by hand. MathType has a Toggle TeX(See 6.1.2.17) feature that allows you to toggle back and forth between Texvc and MathType views of an equation in Microsoft Word.

MathType also includes translators for using MathType with a number of other applications and websites, including Maple, Mathematica, Physics Forum, Wikipedia, and Wolfram|Alpha. Look for these applications by name in the Equation for application or website section of the dialog.

The list of available translators is constantly growing. See Using MathType with Applications and Websites(See 7.) for more information.

MathML See www.w3.org/math for more information on MathML.

We also supply translators for MathML, a markup language based on XML (eXtensible Markup Language) for encoding mathematics. As of this writing MathML 3.0 is a W3C recommendation, but MathType 6.9 doesn't yet have translators for the additional capability provided by MathML

69 MathType for Windows

3. MathType comes with three MathML 2.0 translators that only differ in the namespace in which the MathML is placed. Which one you should pick is determined by the MathML renderer you use; either a browser plug-in (such as MathPlayer, or techexplorer), or a browser with built-in MathML support (Amaya or Firefox). Visit our website, www.dessci.com , for further description of our MathML translators.

Creating and Modifying Translators

If our standard translators do not meet your needs, you may want to modify one of them or write a new one of your own. Each translator is driven by a translation file written in our Translator Definition Language (TDL). You will find several TDL files in MathType's Translators folder, and you can edit these to suit your needs, or write completely new ones. To obtain detailed documentation on writing translators visit our website, www.dessci.com for information on the MathType SDK. 4.3.16 Exporting Equations in Microsoft Word

In this tutorial we show you how to export all the equations in a Word document to individual graphics files. You can export them as GIF, WMF, or EPS files, and you can control the location and naming of the files. You also have the option to replace each equation with the name of its corresponding file. This feature can be useful when importing Word documents into desktop publishing programs. Some software doesn't import embedded equations very well, preferring individual equation files. The Export Equations command makes this process much easier.

1. Launch Word and create a document containing a couple of equations.

2. Choose the Export Equations command on Word's MathType menu or in the Publish group on Word's MathType tab. The Export Equations dialog will appear.

3. Enter a location in the Folder field. You can either type the name of a folder or click the Browse button and select a folder. If you enter the name of a folder that doesn't exist you will be asked if you want to create it. Check the "Delete all files of same type in folder" checkbox if you want all files with the same extension deleted from this folder before exporting. Be careful if you select this option; if you export as GIF files to the folder C:\My Documents then every

70 MathType for Windows

GIF file in this folder will be deleted. It's usually safest to create a new folder for each set of exported equation files.

GIF Settings You can set the resolution, background color, and other attributes of GIF files in MathType's Web and GIF Preferences dialog.

4. Select the format of the exported equation files. You can also set the filename pattern and the starting number. The above example will create the files Eqn001.eps, Eqn002.eps etc. Setting the pattern to "PhysIntro###" and the first number to 50 will create the files PhysIntro050.eps, PhysIntro051.eps, etc. You may want to experiment with different patterns and numbers.

5. Check the "Replace equation with file name" checkbox if you want to replace each exported equation with the corresponding file name. For example, the above settings would insert the text <> in place of the first exported equation. Clear this checkbox if you want to leave the equations in the document unmodified.

6. Choose the "Whole document" option if you want to export all equations in the document. The "Current selection" option is enabled only when you select a portion of the document before running the Export Equations command.

7. Click OK to start the exporting process. When the process has finished, a dialog appears showing how many equations were exported. 4.3.17 Simplifying Rational Expressions by Dividing Common Factors

Quite often in mathematics it's necessary to mark through a term in an expression to show borrowing in a subtraction problem, to divide out common factors in a rational expression, etc. It's a trivial matter with a pencil and paper to perform such a "strike-through", but when writing a document in your word processor, it's a different matter. This tutorial will show how to make such annotations with MathType. We'll assume you're preparing a worksheet showing how to simplify a rational expression:

We want to show students how to divide out the common factors, so we'll use MathType's strike-through templates.

1. Create the first fraction shown above, then type = and insert the second fraction template:

71 MathType for Windows

2. Before typing the numerator, choose the "Strike-through (bottom-left to upper-right)" template from the "Underbar and overbar" templates palette:

3. Inside the strike-through template, type the first factor in the numerator. Press Tab to exit the strike-through template, then type the second factor:

Strike-through thickness If the strike-through line isn't distinct enough when you print or project it, you can increase its thickness. From the Format menu, choose Define Spacing. Scroll down near the bottom of the list until you find Strike-through thickness. Increase the thickness to a value that will make the strike-through more vivid. It's not necessary to click Apply before clicking OK, but doing so allows you to try out different thickness values before choosing the one you like best.

4. Repeat these steps for the denominator.

Strike-throughs in color A good way to draw attention to part of an expression is to create it in a contrasting color. If you're printing your worksheet in

72 MathType for Windows

color or inserting a strike-through into a PowerPoint presentation, choose the strike- through color before choosing the template, then choose the strike-through template. If you want the contents to be black, switch back to black before typing the contents.

5. If you want to complete the steps of the solution, press Enter when you're finished with the second fraction. Type another =, then type the final fraction in simplified form. To align the two lines at the = symbols, choose the Align at = command from the Format menu. The final problem solution should look like this:

4.3.18 What To Do Next

This concludes the last of our tutorials. We certainly haven't covered everything that MathType can do, but if all went well then you've grasped the basic principles. Using MathType with Applications and Websites(See 7.) contains additional information about using MathType with other applications. Creating Web Pages with MathPage(See 6.1.2.14) introduces MathType's MathPage technology, and shows how you can generate great-looking web pages from Word documents.

The Style menu(See 8.3.8) section covers MathType styles and advanced formatting. It's not necessary to read these sections immediately, but once you've progressed beyond creating simple equations you'll find them worth reading. If you get stuck, please get in touch with us - our contact information is listed within Getting Help at the Design Science Website(See 9.2).

73 MathType for Windows

5. Using MathType

In This Chapter Working with the Toolbar(See 5.1) Working with the Keyboard(See 5.2) Working with the Windows 7 Math Input Panel(See 5.3) Working with Files(See 5.4) Working with Insert Symbol(See 5.5) Using Fonts(See 5.6) Other Topics(See 5.7) 5.1 Working with the Toolbar

In This Chapter Adding Expressions to the Bars(See 5.1.1) Editing Expressions in the Bars(See 5.1.2) Editing the Status Bar Description for Expression Bar Items(See 5.1.3) Removing Items from the Bars(See 5.1.4) Adding Symbols and Templates from the Palettes to the Expression Bars(See 5.1.5) Adding Symbols from the Insert Symbol Dialog to the Expression Bars(See 5.1.6) 5.1.1 Adding Expressions to the Bars

To add all or any part of an equation you are working on to the Small Bar, the Large Tabbed Bar, or the Small Tabbed Bar, follow these steps:

1. Select the part of the equation you want to add to a bar or choose Select All from the Edit Menu(See 8.3.2).

2. Position the mouse pointer over the selection.

3. Press and hold the mouse button. A small dotted rectangle should appear next to the mouse pointer indicating you are dragging the expression.

4. Move the mouse pointer over the bar you want to add the expression to and release the mouse button.

See Also

Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1) Adding symbols and templates from the palettes to the bars(See 5.1.5) Removing items from the bars(See 5.1.4)

74 MathType for Windows

5.1.2 Editing Expressions in the Bars

To edit an expression that you have already added to the Small Bar, the Large Tabbed Bar, or the Small Tabbed Bar, just right-click on the expression and choose Edit. This will open the expression in an equation window, allowing you to edit the expression. Once you have made changes, just close the window. The expression will be updated in the toolbar.

You can also right-click on the item and choose Properties from the menu to bring up the Expression Properties Dialog(See 8.4.10), then click the Edit expression... button.

Hint: You can double-click on the item, and it will be opened in a separate window for editing.

See Also

Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1) 5.1.3 Editing the Status Bar Description for Expression Bar Items

To change the status bar description for an expression in the Small Bar, the Large Tabbed Bar, or the Small Tabbed Bar, just right-click on the expression and choose Properties from the menu. This will bring up the Expression Properties Dialog(See 8.4.10) which allows you to change the description.

See Also

Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1) 5.1.4 Removing Items from the Bars

To remove an item from either the Small Bar, the Large Tabbed Bar, or the Small Tabbed Bar, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the Alt key.

2. While holding the Alt key, position the mouse arrow over the item to be removed.

3. Press and hold the mouse button. A small dotted rectangle should appear next to the mouse pointer to indicate you are dragging the symbol or template. You can release the Alt key at this point.

4. While continuing to press the mouse button, move the pointer outside the toolbar and the equation window until the mouse pointer appears as a circle with a diagonal slash, then release the mouse button.

75 MathType for Windows

Hint: You can also right-click on the item and choose Delete from the menu.

See Also

Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1) Adding symbols and templates from the palettes to the bars(See 5.1.5) Adding expressions to the bars(See 5.1.1) 5.1.5 Adding Symbols and Templates from the Palettes to the Expression Bars

To add a symbol or template from the palettes to either the Small Bar, the Large Tabbed Bar, or the Small Tabbed Bar, follow these steps:

1. Click once in the palette button to open it.

2. Find the desired symbol or template in the palette.

3. Press and hold the Alt key.

4. While holding the Alt key, position the mouse arrow over the symbol or template.

5. Press and hold the mouse button. You can release the Alt key at this point. A small dotted rectangle should appear next to the mouse pointer indicating you are dragging the item. A symbol will appear when you are over an area that is not a valid area to add the template or symbol.

6. While continuing to press the mouse button, move the pointer over the bar that you want to add the item to and release the mouse button. As you move over a Tab, the toolbar will update to display that tab's contents, to help you find where you want to add the button.

See Also

Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1) Removing items from the bars(See 5.1.4) Symbol palettes(See 8.6.4) Template palettes(See 8.6.5) 5.1.6 Adding Symbols from the Insert Symbol Dialog to the Expression Bars

To add a symbol from the Insert Symbol Dialog(See 8.4.13)'s symbol grid to the Small Bar, the Large Tabbed Bar, or the Small Tabbed Bar, follow these steps:

1. Select the desired symbol or character in the grid.

76 MathType for Windows

2. Press and hold the Alt key.

3. While holding the Alt key, position the mouse arrow over the symbol.

4. Press and hold the mouse button. You can release the Alt key at this point.

5. While continuing to press the mouse button, move the pointer over the bar that you want to add the item to and release the mouse button. As you move over a Tab, the toolbar will update to display that tab's contents, to help you find where you want to add the button.

See Also

Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1) Removing Items from the Bars(See 5.1.4) 5.2 Working with the Keyboard

In This Chapter Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1) Adding a Keyboard Shortcut for an Expression(See 5.2.2) One-shot style shortcuts(See 5.2.3) Using TeX Language Input(See 5.2.4) 5.2.1 Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts

You can review, assign, or remove Keyboard Shortcuts(See 11.24) in several dialogs:

 Insert Symbol Dialog(See 8.4.13) (on the Edit menu)

Use this dialog to review, assign, or remove keyboard shortcuts associated with the currently selected symbol in the grid.

 Expression Properties Dialog(See 8.4.10) (right-click on a toolbar cell and choose Properties)

Use this dialog to review, assign, or remove keyboard shortcuts associated with the selected toolbar expression.

 Customize Keyboard Dialog(See 8.4.2) (on the Preferences menu)

Use this dialog to review, assign, or remove all keyboard shortcuts. However, you must use the Insert Symbol Dialog(See 8.4.13) to assign new keyboard shortcuts to characters in fonts.

The keyboard shortcut section at the bottom of each of these dialogs contains the same items and they work the same way in each:

Enter new shortcut key(s)

77 MathType for Windows

Enter keystrokes here to assign a new keyboard shortcut . Use Backspace or Delete to delete a keystroke. Once you have entered the desired keys, click Assign to assign the keystroke(s) to the command.

When the insertion point is in this item, you will not be able to use the normal keystrokes such as Tab to navigate around in the dialog. Press Esc to get out of this item.

Assigned to

Once you have entered some keystrokes, this item shows you to which command (if any) the keystrokes are currently assigned. Use this item to prevent accidentally removing an assignment you want to keep.

Current keys

This shows the keystroke shortcut(s) currently assigned to the command. Select a shortcut in this list and click Remove to delete a shortcut.

Assign

Once you have entered new keystrokes, this button can be used to assign them to the command. Once you have done this, the new keystroke shortcut will be displayed in the Current keys list.

Remove

Once you have selected an existing keyboard shortcut in the Current keys list, click this button to delete it.

See Also

MathType Reference: Keyboard Shortcuts(See 8.5) 5.2.2 Adding a Keyboard Shortcut for an Expression

To add a keyboard shortcut for an expression in the toolbar, right-click it and choose Properties to bring up the Expression Properties Dialog(See 8.4.10), then enter or change the keyboard shortcut assigned to the expression.

See Also

Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1) 5.2.3 One-shot style shortcuts

One-shot style commands allow you to quickly enter a character into an equation without changing the current style(See 5.6.1) . If you type the shortcut assigned to one of these commands, the style associated with the command will be used on the next character you type.

78 MathType for Windows

There are four one-shot style commands:

Greek-Symbol Ctrl+G

This will assign the L.C. Greek or the U.C. Greek style if you type a letter, or the Symbol style if you type anything else.

User 1 Ctrl+U

This will assign the User 1 style to the next character you type.

User 2 Alt+Ctrl+U

This will assign the User 2 style to the next character you type.

Vector-Matrix Ctrl+B

This will assign the Vector- Matrix style to the next character you type.

The shortcuts shown here are MathType's defaults. You can assign different shortcuts using the Customize Keyboard Dialog(See 8.4.2) under the Style for Next Typed Character category. 5.2.4 Using TeX Language Input

MathType allows keyboard input of a subset of TeX supported by Wikipedia. See the help topic Displaying a formula in the MediaWiki handbook for an explanation of this language.

To use this feature, you need to enable the Allow TeX language entry from the keyboard option in the Workspace Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.30) in the MathType Preferences menu.

Entering Equations

Equations typed using TeX in MathType must begin with the characters $, \, ^, or _. This switches the editor to an input mode, which changes the text color to grey. Once you have completed entering an equation, exit input mode by pressing Enter on the keyboard. MathType will then convert the TeX to a MathType equation.

For example, entering the following equation in TeX,

will result in this MathType equation.

Errors

MathType will attempt to parse as much of the input as it can, and show the errors it encounters in red. To correct errors, choose Undo from the Edit menu, or Ctrl-Z, to return to input mode.

79 MathType for Windows

Copy/Pasting

TeX can be pasted into MathType whether or not the Allow TeX language entry from the keyboard option has been enabled. This is useful when pasting equations copied from Wikipedia.

See Also

Typing TeX Directly Into Word 2007-2013 (Toggle TeX)(See 6.1.2.17)

Typing TeX Directly Into Word Pre-2007 (Toggle TeX)(See 6.2.2.18) Working With TeX(See 7.2.4) 5.3 Working with the Windows 7 Math Input Panel

Located in the Accessories group in Windows 7, the Math Input Panel (MIP) lets you write mathematics the natural way -- by hand. MathType lets you easily use this interface either in lieu of or in combination with MathType's palettes and toolbar. The MIP is designed to be used with a tablet PC, but you can use it with any input device -- mouse, touchpad, touchscreen, etc.

Using the Math Input Panel with MathType

To use, follow these steps: o Choose the Open Math Input Panel… command in MathType's Edit menu. o When the MIP appears, write the equation in the MIP writing area. o Confirm your equation in the preview area. o If equation is incorrect, use one of the correction buttons. o Once you've confirmed the accuracy of the equation, tap Insert to place the equation into MathType.

Using the Math Input Panel with Word

To use, follow these steps:

o Choose the Open Math Input Panel... command in the Insert Equations group of the MathType tab in Word. If you're using a version of Word earlier than Word 2007, this command will be on the MathType toolbar and in the MathType menu in Word. o Write the equation in the MIP writing area. o Once you've confirmed the accuracy of the equation, tap Insert to place the equation into MathType.

Using the Math Input Panel with PowerPoint

There is no direct command in PowerPoint that will open the MIP. Follow the instructions for using the MIP with PowerPoint 2007-2013 or with PowerPoint 2002-2003(See 6.2.3.2).

80 MathType for Windows

See Also

Load Equation Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.16) Save Equation Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.25) 5.6.5 Letting Other People View and Print your Documents

If you give someone a document that contains MathType or Equation Editor equations, they will need to install all fonts used by the document and its equations in order to properly view and print the document. The same also goes for individual equation files, except for GIF files which are bitmaps and therefore do not require fonts.

You can send the fonts to your associate along with the document. This can be done with the MathType fonts. However, this may violate your license agreement for the other fonts.

If the document is a Microsoft Word document, you can make use of its font embedding feature to attach the fonts to the document. This is available as an option in Word's Save As dialog. Other applications may have a similar font embedding feature.

84 MathType for Windows

Note: Embedding fonts in a Word document or a PowerPoint presentation is a 2-step process. First, you need to physically add one character to your document or presentation from each MathType font you used in your equations (except for "text" fonts). Normally this includes only the font named MT Extra. Probably the best place to do this is somewhere in the first page header or footer of your document, or in an out of the way place on the title slide. Once you decide where to put it, change to the MT Extra font and press the spacebar. Repeat this process for any other MathType fonts you used, such as Euclid Math Two, etc. Next, in Word's or PowerPoint's Save (or Save As) dialog, click Tools > Save Options. Place a checkmark by Embed fonts in the file, but do not check the Embed only the characters used in the document option. Click OK to dismiss the dialog, and click Save to save the document. You only have to do this once for each document or presentation. On subsequent saves, the fonts will remain embedded.

MathType's Font Installers

In order to make it easy to distribute MathType's fonts to other people that need to view or print your documents and to streamline the font installation process, we have two font installer programs available to you: one for TrueType fonts and one for PostScript fonts.

If you purchased MathType in CD-ROM form, these font installers are located in the MathType\Fonts folder on the CD. If you purchased MathType electronically, the same font installers are available on the support section of our website . You are free to distribute these font installers to anyone as long as you follow our Font License Agreement(See 10.3).

If possible, refer people that want to view or print your documents to the Design Science website to download the font installers, rather than sending them in email or on disk. This will ensure that they get the latest versions.

Remember, if your document or its equations use other fonts besides MathType's, these must also be installed in order to print or view them.

85 MathType for Windows

5.6.6 Adding to MathType's Font and Character Knowledge

MathType has a database of characters it uses to make decisions like:

 How much space will be inserted around the character  Which of MathType's styles(See 5.6.1) should be assigned to it  How will it be translated to TeX(See 11.41), MathML(See 11.28), etc  What description will be shown in the Status Bar(See 5.7.4) and in the Insert Symbol Dialog(See 8.4.13)

MathType also contains information on what characters are present in the fonts installed on your computer, both MathType's own fonts and any other fonts you might have.

Although MathType has knowledge of many of the mathematical characters and fonts that are in common use, it can't possibly know them all as there are literally thousands of fonts in existence.

We at Design Science expect to continually add to MathType's font and character database with new releases. If you want to add information for your own fonts and their characters, please contact us at [email protected] for more information. You can also add information to MathType's font and character knowledge yourself by modifying the file fontinfo.ini which is located in the Fonts folder inside the MathType folder. See the contents of fontinfo.ini for instructions. For more information, visit the support section of our website . 5.7 Other Topics

In This Chapter Drag & Drop(See 5.7.1) Replacing one Template with Another(See 5.7.2) Ruler(See 5.7.3) Status Bar(See 5.7.4) Checking For the Latest Version(See 5.7.5) OLE's Insert Object Command(See 5.7.6) Pasting tables and spreadsheet cells(See 5.7.7) 5.7.1 Drag & Drop

Any selected part of an equation may be moved or copied to the toolbar or some other place in the equation by using the drag-and-drop technique:

1. Select the part of the equation you want to move or copy.

86 MathType for Windows

2. Click on the selection with the mouse and hold the mouse button down.

3. While continuing to hold the mouse button down, move the mouse pointer over the place you want to move or copy to.

4. When the mouse pointer is in the desired position, release the button to complete the operation.

5. Normally, the selected part of the equation will be moved to the new location but, if you hold the Ctrl key down while dragging, it will be copied, leaving the original material intact.

Similarly, you can move or copy a toolbar item within the toolbar by holding the Alt key down while clicking in it, and then simply dragging it to another place on the toolbar. 5.7.2 Replacing one Template with Another

Sometimes it is necessary to replace one template in your equation with another after you have already filled the template's slots. To avoid having to do a lot of cutting and pasting or re- entering of the expressions, you can replace the original template by another different one from the toolbar. Follow these steps:

1. Select the template and its contents to be replaced. Be careful not to select adjacent characters or templates.

2. While holding the Ctrl key down, select the new template from the Template Palettes.

The new template will replace the old one and the expressions in the original template's slots will be moved to the corresponding slots of the new template. 5.7.3 Ruler

MathType's ruler is divided into three panes, the Tab Well pane, the Ruler pane, and the Tab Stop pane.

Tab Well pane and Tab Stop pane

MathType's tabs work roughly the same as those found in most popular word processing applications. You choose the type of tab you want by clicking its tab well on the ruler. There are five tab wells to choose from:

 Left tab  Center tab  Right tab  Relational tab  Decimal tab

87 MathType for Windows

Click one of the five tab wells to choose the tab stop type, then click in the Tab Stop pane to set the position of the tab stop.

Each slot in an equation has its own tab stops. If you press Enter within a slot or at the end of a line, you create a pile(See 11.33). The same tab stops apply to every line in the pile. The ruler shows only the tab stops belonging to the current slot or pile (the one containing the selection or insertion point). To remove a tab stop, drag it downward away from the ruler. To change the location of an existing tab stop, drag it along the ruler. The small inverted T marks on the ruler are default tab stops, and are placed every ½ ", regardless of the ruler units(See 8.4.23).

Effects of Tab Characters

Pressing Ctrl+Tab will insert a tab character into your equation. If you just press the Tab key, this moves the insertion point, so to enter tab characters you must hold down the Ctrl key. Tab characters inserted in this way divide the items in a line into several groups, called tab groups. Left, Center, and Right tabs align the characters along the left edge, center, or right edge of the group, respectively.

A relational tab aligns its tab group at a relational operator, including the equals sign, inequality signs like <, >, , , any symbol from the Relational symbols(See 8.5.7.2) palette, as well as most of the relational operators and set theory symbols you may find with the Insert Symbol dialog(See 8.4.13).

A decimal tab will align a column of numbers at either a period or a comma, depending on your Regional and Language Options in the Windows Control Panel. If one of the numbers does not have a period or comma, it will align to the right of the number's units digit. Ruler pane

The ruler pane gives you a convenient gauge to monitor the size of your equation, as well as to align multiple expressions on the same line and to align the lines in a pile. The default unit for ruler graduations is inches. If you prefer to work in centimeters, points, or picas, double-click the ruler pane to bring up the Ruler Units dialog. Make your choice of ruler units and click OK.

See Also

Formatting with Tabs(See 4.3.10) Ruler Units Dialog(See 8.4.23) 5.7.4 Status Bar

The Status Bar is displayed along the bottom edge of every equation window. It contains four areas that show the settings that will be used for material you subsequently type:

Style

This area shows which of MathType's styles(See 5.6.1) will be assigned to characters you enter. Normally, this is Math which means MathType will automatically assign styles based on which characters you type: the Function style for functions, the Variable style for variables,

88 MathType for Windows and so on. You can cause characters you type to have a specific style or font by choosing commands from the Style menu(See 8.3.8). As a shortcut, you can also right-click in this status bar area to choose from the same menu.

Size

This area shows which of MathType's typesizes(See 11.45) will be assigned to characters you enter. Normally, MathType will automatically assign sizes based on the position of the slot containing the insertion point or selection; Subscript size in a subscript or limit, for example. You can cause characters you type to have a specific size by choosing commands from the Size menu(See 8.3.9). As a shortcut, you can also right-click in this area to choose a new size.

Zoom

This area shows the current viewing scale for the window. This can be changed by choosing commands from the Zoom sub-menu(See 8.3.4) on the View menu(See 8.3.3) or by double- clicking in this area to bring up the Zoom dialog(See 8.4.31). You can also right-click in this area to choose a new zoom scale.

Color

This area shows which color will be assigned to characters you enter. To change this color, choose commands from the Color sub-menu(See 8.3.6) on the Format menu(See 8.3.5) or double-click on this area to bring up the Color dialog. As a shortcut, you can also right-click in this area to choose a color.

Hint: you can double-click on any of the areas on the status bar to display the relevant dialog, or right-click to display the appropriate menu. 5.7.5 Checking For the Latest Version

89 MathType for Windows

5.7.6 OLE's Insert Object Command

Most OLE(See 11.31)-compatible applications have an Insert Object command. This is usually the Object… command on the Insert menu, but may be available in other ways (e.g., a toolbar button, a different menu item, etc.). If you have trouble finding an application's Insert Object command, look up "OLE" in its documentation.

This command allows you to insert any kind of object for which you have software installed on your computer, including equations. The Insert Object command will bring up a list of all the objects you can insert. To insert an equation, select MathType 6.0 Equation. 5.7.7 Pasting tables and spreadsheet cells

MathType includes an easy-to-use mechanism for building matrices and tables via the Matrix templates(See 8.5.8.10) palette and Matrix Dialog(See 8.4.19). You can also copy tables and spreadsheet cells, and paste them into MathType as matrices.

Input from spreadsheets

To create a matrix in MathType from data in an Excel spreadsheet, select the cells containing the data, then copy and paste into MathType. In general, the formatting will not carry over from Excel to MathType, but the "shape" of the copied region will. For example, if you're copying a block of data in Excel that's 5 rows by 2 columns, this will result in a 5x2 matrix in MathType.

 A single row of data will result in a single line of characters in MathType -- not a row matrix.  A single column of data will result in a properly-formatted column matrix in MathType.

Note: Although we specify Excel here, this should also work with Google Docs spreadsheets, and probably others. It does not work with OpenOffice.

Converting text to matrices (from a text editor or word processor)

It's possible to define matrices in plain text format, then paste them into MathType, and MathType will format the matrix accordingly.

 A 1-column or 1-row matrix may be a valid matrix, but you'll need to create this from scratch in MathType (or paste it from a spreadsheet). Pasting a single column of numbers into MathType will result in a pile(See 11.33). Pasting a single row of data results in a single line of characters in MathType. Hence, the minimum size of a "plain text" matrix is 2x2.  You must separate matrix cells with Tab characters (i.e., tab-delimited data).  To create a new row, create a new line of text (i.e., press Enter).  Empty cells are OK; just use a Tab as the empty character. Example:

90 MathType for Windows

a11 {tab} {tab} {tab} a13

a21 {tab} a22 {tab} a23

 Every line of text in the matrix definition should have the same number of cells.

91 MathType for Windows

6. MathType with Microsoft Office

In This Chapter Office 2007-2013(See 6.1) Office 2002-2003(See 6.2)

6.1 Office 2007-2013

In This Chapter Microsoft Excel -- pasting a range of cells into MathType(See 6.1.1) MathType's Support for Microsoft Word(See 6.1.2) MathType's Support for Microsoft PowerPoint(See 6.1.3) 6.1.1 Microsoft Excel -- pasting a range of cells into MathType

 A single row of data will result in a single line in MathType -- not a row matrix.  A single column of data will result in a properly-formatted column matrix in MathType.

This may also work in spreadsheets other than Excel, and in word processors and text editors. Follow the link below for more information.

See Also: Pasting tables and spreadsheet cells(See 5.7.7) 6.1.2 MathType's Support for Microsoft Word

In This Chapter Support for Microsoft Word(See 6.1.2.1) MathType Tab in Microsoft Word(See 6.1.2.2) Inserting MathType Equations(See 6.1.2.3) Numbering Equations(See 6.1.2.4)

92 MathType for Windows

Inserting Equation Numbers and References Step-by-Step(See 6.1.2.5) Browsing by Equations, Equation Numbers and Chapter/Section Breaks(See 6.1.2.6) Using Equation Preferences(See 6.1.2.7) Format Equations(See 6.1.2.8) Format Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.1.2.9) Converting Equations(See 6.1.2.10) Converting Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.1.2.11) Exporting Equations(See 6.1.2.12) Exporting Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.1.2.13) Creating Web Pages with MathPage(See 6.1.2.14) Publishing to MathPage Step-by-Step(See 6.1.2.15) Publishing to MathPage using MathML(See 6.1.2.16) Typing TeX Directly Into Word (Toggle TeX)(See 6.1.2.17) Reference: MathType Dialogs in Word(See 6.1.2.18)

6.1.2.1 Support for Microsoft Word

MathType adds several commands to Microsoft Word that you will find useful when creating and working with documents containing equations. You will find these commands on the MathType Tab(See 6.1.2.2) on Word's Ribbon.

Here are some of the tasks you can perform:

 Insert equations into your document. There are separate commands for inserting inline equations(See 11.22), display equations(See 11.9), and left- or right-numbered display equations. See Inserting MathType Equations(See 6.1.2.3), Left-Numbered Display Equation(See 11.26), and Right-Numbered Display Equation(See 11.36).  Set the equation preferences to be used for new equations in the document. See Using Equation Preferences(See 6.2.2.8).  Convert documents into Web pages using the Publish to MathPage command. See Publish to MathPage Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.11).  Export equations in a Word document to individual picture files with the Export Equations command. See Export Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.10).  Change the format of equations in the current selection or the entire document. See Format Equations(See 6.2.2.9).  Add equation numbers and references that will automatically be renumbered after editing. See Numbering Equations(See 6.2.2.5).  Convert Equation Editor equations to MathType equations. See Converting Equations(See 6.2.2.11).  Convert equations to TeX(See 11.41), MathML(See 11.28), or any other language for which we have a translator. See Cut and Copy Preferences(See 7.2.2).  Browse by Equations, Equation Numbers, and Chapter/Section Breaks(See 6.1.2.6).

93 MathType for Windows

The MathType Setup application automatically installs MathType's support for Word, for each version of Word it detects on your computer. However, if you install a new version of Word after you install MathType, the commands will not be available for the new version of Word. In this case just re-install MathType.

If you want to remove the MathType commands temporarily from Word, click the Microsoft Office Button, click Word Options, and then click Add-ins. In the Manage box, click Templates, and then click Go. Uncheck the box next to the MathType Commands item. To remove them permanently, quit Word and remove the MathType 6 Commands for Word file from Word's startup folder.

See Also

MathType's Support for Microsoft PowerPoint(See 6.1.3)

6.1.2.2 MathType Tab in Microsoft Word

In This Chapter Insert Equations Group(See 6.1.2.2.1) Symbols Group(See 6.1.2.2.2) Equation Numbers Group(See 6.1.2.2.3) Browse Group(See 6.1.2.2.4) Format Group(See 6.1.2.2.5) Publish Group(See 6.1.2.2.6) MathType Group(See 6.1.2.2.7)

6.1.2.2.1 Insert Equations Group

The appearance of the Insert Equations group depends on your version of Windows:

Windows 7 Windows 2000 through Vista

Insert Inline Equation Ctrl+Alt+Q

Opens a new MathType window ready for you to enter an equation. If you have defined equation preferences(See 11.12) for new equations (using the Set Equation Preferences command), these settings will be used in the MathType window. Otherwise MathType's current preferences for new

94 MathType for Windows

equations(See 11.29) will be used. The resulting equation is inserted inline, i.e., aligned with the surrounding text.

Insert Display Equation Alt+Q

Opens a new MathType window using equation preferences as described above under Insert Inline Equation. The display equation(See 11.9) is inserted on a new line and centered between the left and right margins.

To simplify changing the formatting for all of the display equations in a document, a Word style called MTDisplayEquation is created that defines the position of the center tab stop. This means that you can change the alignment of all of the display equations in a document by simply modifying this style.

Insert Right-Numbered Display Equation Alt+Shift+Q

Similar to Insert Display Equation, but also inserts a right-aligned equation number following the equation. The MTDisplayEquation style defines the location of the right margin tab stop.

Insert Left-Numbered Display Equation Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Q

Similar to Insert Display Equation, but also inserts a left-aligned equation number before the equation. The MTDisplayEquation style defines the location of the center tab stop.

Open Math Input Panel... Ctrl+Shift+M

(Windows 7 only) Insert an equation by handwriting it in the Math Input Panel (MIP). When you click the MIP Insert button, the equation will be placed at the insertion point. This command is not available in versions of Windows earlier than Windows 7.

See Also

Inserting MathType Equations(See 6.1.2.3)

6.1.2.2.2 Symbols Group

95 MathType for Windows

The controls in the symbols group contain common mathematical symbols as well as many other symbols and characters for use in the document. For more information about inserting symbols in Word, open Word's help by hovering over Other in the Symbols Group and pressing the F1 key.

Note: While you can create inline equations in MathType consisting of a single symbol, we recommend you insert symbols from the Symbol Group on the MathType tab instead. Equations have more overhead in the document, and for large documents the difference can be significant.

6.1.2.2.3 Equation Numbers Group

Insert Number

Inserts an equation number at the insertion point. The default format includes a section number and an equation number. The equation number increments each time you insert a number. You can define the section number using Insert Break... under Chapters & Sections. Use Format... to set or change the number format.

Format...

Opens the Format Equation Numbers Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.7), which allows you to change the format of new and/or existing equation numbers. You can also turn off automatic updating of equation numbers and references in this dialog.

Update

Updates all equation numbers and equation references in the document, including those in footnotes and endnotes. You need to use this command if you turn off automatic updating in the Format Equation Numbers Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.7), or if you move or delete any equation numbers in your document.

Insert Reference

96 MathType for Windows

Inserts a reference to an existing equation number. It inserts a copy of the referenced equation number at the insertion point. In addition, if you double-click on a reference your document will scroll to the referenced equation. When equation numbers are updated, equation references will be updated as well.

Place the insertion point at the place where you wish to insert the reference, and click this button (the Insert Equation Reference Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.3) will appear). Next, double-click on the equation number you want to reference (you may have to scroll the document to find the equation).

Chapters & Sections

Insert Next Section Break

Inserts a section break and numbers it by incrementing the number of the previous section break.

Insert Next Chapter Break

Inserts a chapter break and numbers it by incrementing the number of the previous chapter break.

Insert Break...

Opens the Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.4), which allows you to insert an equation section break. Equation sections define the section number used in equation numbers.

Modify Break...

Opens the Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.5), which allows you to locate and modify the current chapter/section break (the one preceding the current position of the insertion point).

6.1.2.2.4 Browse Group

The Browse group allows you to browse up or down through the document, stopping at Equations, Equation Numbers, or Chapter/Section Breaks.

See Also

Browsing by Equations, Equation Numbers and Chapter/Section Breaks(See 6.1.2.6)

97 MathType for Windows

6.1.2.2.5 Format Group

Equation Preferences

This command opens the Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.1), which allows you to specify the equation preferences(See 11.12) to be used for new equations you insert into the document.

Format Equations

Opens the Format Equations Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.8), which allows you to change the format of the equations in the current selection or the entire document.

Convert Equations

Opens the Convert Equations Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.9), which allows you to convert equations in your document to a format you specify (including TeX(See 11.41) or MathML(See 11.28)).

See Also

Format Equations(See 6.1.2.8) Converting Equations(See 6.1.2.10)

6.1.2.2.6 Publish Group

Export Equations

Opens the Export Equations Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.10), which allows you to export the equations in your document into individual graphics files.

Publish to MathPage

Opens the Publish to MathPage Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.11), which allows you to export the document as a Web page including MathPage technology to handle the equations.

Toggle TeX

98 MathType for Windows

The Toggle TeX command allows you to type Texvc(See 11.43) directly into a Word document and convert it into a MathType equation. Since it's a "toggle", choosing the command again will return the MathType equations to Texvc.

See Also

Exporting Equations(See 6.1.2.12) Creating Web Pages with MathPage(See 6.1.2.16)

6.1.2.2.7 MathType Group

MathType Help

Contents and Index...

Opens MathType Help

Using MathType in Word...

Opens MathType's Help for Microsoft Word

Unlock/Register MathType...

Gives you information on how to enter your product key to unlock MathType as well as register your product so you can receive free technical support, upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing.

About MathType...

Displays MathType's About box showing you: o The version of the MathType application you are currently using o Copyright information o Your product registration information, including your partial product key if you have unlocked MathType, or the number of days left in the evaluation period if MathType is in evaluation mode

MathType on the Web

MathType Home Page...

Opens the MathType home page (e.g. http://www.dessci.com/en for English).

Online Support...

99 MathType for Windows

Opens the tech support area of the MathType Web site, where we have many tips and tech support notices that will give you help solving problems and information on compatibility with other applications.

Send Feedback by Email...

Opens your email program so that you can send feedback to Design Science regarding your experiences with MathType or to request future enhancements. If you have a problem using MathType or a bug to report, please visit our online tech support area first.

Order MathType...

Opens the e-commerce area of the Design Science Web site where you can purchase MathType (or any of our other products).

Future MathType

Opens a page on our website that will allow you to give us your ideas for future enhancements of MathType.

Dialog box launcher

Opens MathType Options dialog(See 6.1.2.18.12).

6.1.2.3 Inserting MathType Equations

The MathType commands for Word provide six methods for inserting MathType equations into Word documents. These are:

 Inserting an inline equation(See 11.22)  Inserting a display equation(See 11.9)  Inserting a right-numbered display equation(See 11.36)  Inserting a left-numbered display equation(See 11.26)  Open Math Input Panel  Toggle MathType/TeX

We recommend that you always use one of these commands to insert equations as they work properly with the Using Equation Preferences(See 6.1.2.7) commands that help ensure consistency between the equations in your documents.

The Insert Inline Equation command inserts a MathType equation at the insertion point. The equation is adjusted to align itself with the surrounding text, so use this command when you want to insert an equation in a sentence.

Note: While you can create inline equations consisting of a single symbol, we recommend you use Word's Insert Symbol command instead. Equations have more

100 MathType for Windows

overhead in the document, and for large documents the difference can be significant.

The Insert Display Equation and Insert Left/Right-Numbered Display Equation commands are very similar. They insert a new line if the insertion point isn't already on a new line, and then insert an equation centered between the left and right margins. The Insert Right- Numbered Display Equation command inserts a right-justified equation number following the equation, while the Insert Left-Numbered Display Equation command inserts a left-aligned equation number before the equation.

A Word style named MTDisplayEquation is added to the Word document the first time you use any of these three commands. This style defines the center tab and the right tab positions. Its other formatting is based on the style in use at the time it's created. You can change the alignment of all the display equations in a document by modifying this style using the Style command on Word's Format menu. This style is created separately for each document into which you insert a display equation.

The Open Math Input Panel… command (Windows 7 only) brings up the Math Input Panel (MIP). Write the equation in the MIP and when you're finished, click the Insert button. The equation will be placed at the location of the insertion point. Functions in your list of Functions Recognized are also recognized in the MIP. This command is only available on computers running Windows 7.

The Toggle MathType/TeX command allows you to type Texvc(See 11.43) directly into a Word document and convert it into a MathType equation. Since it's a "toggle", choosing the command again will return the MathType equations to TeX. When typing TeX, using either the $...$ or $...$ delimiters results in a MathType Inline Equation after applying the toggle, and using either the $$...$$ or \[...\] delimiters results in a MathType Display Equation after the toggle. To use the toggle with a single equation, click the Toggle MathType/TeX icon and the equation nearest the insertion point will be converted to a MathType equation. To convert the entire document, select the document contents (Ctrl+A); to convert part of it, select the part you want to convert. Click the toggle. To convert the equations back, repeat the procedure. Inserting and Opening Equations Using Keyboard Shortcuts

MathType equations can be inserted in a Microsoft Word document using keyboard shortcuts. The equation will be inserted at the current cursor location in the document. There are shortcuts for each type of MathType equation.

 Insert display equation (Alt+Q)  Insert inline equation (Crtl+Alt+Q)  Insert right-numbered equation (Alt+Shift+Q)  Insert left-numbered equation (Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Q)  Open Math Input Panel (Ctrl+Shift+M)  Toggle MathType/TeX (Alt+\)

There are also keyboard shortcuts for opening an existing equation in MathType for editing. Select the equation to be edited, and use the following:

101 MathType for Windows

 Edit equation in-place in the document (Alt+E)  Open equation for editing in a separate MathType window (Alt+O)

6.1.2.4 Numbering Equations

The equation numbering commands allow you to insert equation numbers in a Word document in a variety of formats. You can also insert references to these numbers. Both numbers and references are automatically updated whenever you add new equation numbers to the document. Equation references can also be placed in footnotes and endnotes.

The equation numbers are quite separate from equations in a Word document. If you delete an equation its equation number (if any) is not automatically deleted. Similarly, an equation reference is actually a reference to an equation number, rather than a reference to the equation itself.

The format of equation numbers in a document is defined using the Format Equation Number Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.7). Equation numbers are comprised of a chapter number, a section number, a separator, an equation number and an enclosure. This allows numbers such as (1.1.1), [I.i], {A.a}, or even Equation 1.1. The chapter number, section number, separator and enclosure are all optional, so you can create equation numbers such as (1.1), 1.1, or just 1 or a.

If you are using the chapter and/or section numbers, you must insert a chapter/section break before the first number to define the chapter/section values. A break can have an explicit value or be set to increment by one the value of the preceding equation section.

As you edit a document, equation numbers or references may get out of sequence (e.g., you move sections around). Use the Update Equation Numbers command in the toolbar, Ribbon, or MathType menu to update the sequence. If you select a region of your document, only this region will be updated, which can be useful with very large documents where updating can take a relatively long time.

Note for users of previous versions of MathType The equation numbering in MathType 5 and later is more sophisticated than in previous versions of MathType. It is fully compatible with older documents; they'll display properly and you can insert equation numbers and references. If you modify the number format with the MathType 5 or later command, however, a MathType 4 user will not be able to insert equation numbers using the new format. The document will still display and print properly.

See Also

102 MathType for Windows

Inserting Equation Numbers and References Step by Step(See 6.1.2.5)

6.1.2.5 Inserting Equation Numbers and References Step-by-Step

To insert equation numbers and references in a Word document, follow these steps.

1. Define the desired number format for this document using the Format Equation Numbers command. You can change this format at any time, for either all existing equation numbers, just the selected equation numbers, or for new equation numbers.

2. Create a chapter/section break using the Insert Chapter/Section Break command. You should insert this in the document ahead of the first equation number you plan to add. The breaks are inserted as hidden text so that they won't normally appear.

Note: If you have not set your Chapter/Section breaks the first time you insert an equation number or a numbered equation, the Insert Equation Number Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.6) appears, which allows you to set the chapter/number breaks.

3. Place the insertion point at the desired location and use the Insert Equation Number command to insert an equation number.

4. To insert a reference to this equation number, place the insertion point in the desired location for the reference and choose the Insert Equation Reference command. Then, double-click the equation number to be referenced, and the reference will be inserted at the original location.

5. To modify the chapter and/or section values of a break, use the Modify Chapter/Section Break command. The closest preceding chapter/section break will be made visible and selected, and in the dialog that appears you can modify or delete the break.

6. To view all chapter/section breaks, click the Show/Hide button in Word. To hide them, click this button again (you don't need to hide them when printing, as they won't appear in the printed output). When equation section breaks are shown, a quick way to open the Modify Chapter/Section Break dialog is to double-click on a break.

7. If you insert equation numbers out of sequence, the existing numbers and references will be automatically updated. If you copy, move or delete an equation number or reference, however, you must use the Update Equation Numbers command to refresh the sequence.

8. The equation number updating that occurs after you insert an equation number is usually very fast. However, you may find this updating takes a while if you are working on a slower computer or on a large document containing many equation numbers and references. The Format Equation Number Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.7) contains an option to turn off automatic updating. After you've finished entering equation numbers, be sure to use the Update Equation Numbers command to refresh the numbering sequence.

103 MathType for Windows

Note: Update Equation Numbers works on selected text, or the whole document if there's no selection. For large documents it may be faster to select and update just the section of the document that requires it. But if you've made lots of changes, it's safest to update the entire document.

6.1.2.6 Browsing by Equations, Equation Numbers and Chapter/Section Breaks

The MathType browse controls allow you to search through your documents for three types of objects:

 Equations Traverses all equations.  Equation Numbers Steps though all the Equation Numbers created by MathType.  Chapter/Section breaks Helps find the normally invisible Chapter/Section breaks. The current chapter/section break will appear in red until you click the Previous or Next buttons, or elsewhere in the document.

Note: When browsing by Chapter/Section breaks, the breaks become visible and remain visible after browsing is complete. You can make the breaks disappear again by clicking the Show/Hide icon on the toolbar or ribbon.

To start the search, select the object to search for and click the Next or Previous buttons. The browse feature will search all visible parts of the document starting at cursor position. This includes headers and footers, if visible.

6.1.2.7 Using Equation Preferences

When you create a document containing equations, you typically want all of the equations to use the same fonts, sizes, and spacing so they look consistent throughout the document. We recommend you save these equation settings in a MathType preference file so you can reload them into MathType if you need to create new equations in this particular document again. (MathType equations contain the preferences they were created with, and these preferences are used when the equation is edited in MathType).

However, you may be working on several different documents that each use different equation preferences. In this situation it can be awkward to keep loading preference files, and even to remember which preference file is associated with each Word document.

104 MathType for Windows

The Equation Preferences command allows you to save equation preferences inside your Word document. Whenever you insert a new equation in this document these preferences will be used for the new equation instead of MathType's current preference settings for new equations. This allows you to create equations that look similar without having to remember which preference file you originally used. Also, if you send the Word document to another MathType user any equations he or she insert will also use the correct equation preferences.

To save equation preferences in a document, follow these steps:

1. In MathType, set your desired preferences using the Define Styles(See 8.4.6), Define Sizes(See 8.4.4), and Define Spacing(See 8.4.5) dialogs.

2. Save these preferences as a MathType preference file using the Save Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.25).

3. In Word, open the document and choose the Equation Preferences command on the MathType Tab (MathType Menu(See 6.2.2.2), MathType Tab in Microsoft Word(See 6.1.2.2)).

4. In the Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.1) choose the This document's equation preferences option, click the Load from MathType preference file button and select the file you just saved.

5. You can view the preferences by clicking the Preview button.

Click OK and the contents of the file will be copied into the Word document (for the curious, they are saved as a custom document property).

6.1.2.8 Format Equations

This command allows you to change the formatting of all MathType, Equation Editor, and Word EQ field equations in the chosen range. It applies the equation preferences(See 11.12) (styles, sizes, spacing) you choose to all equations in the current selection or the entire document.

Note that Equation Editor equations and Word EQ fields will be converted to MathType equation objects by this operation. If you do not want this to happen, you must choose a range that omits them.

See Also

Format Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.1.2.9)

6.1.2.9 Format Equations Step-by-Step

To re-format the equations in a Word document, follow these steps:

105 MathType for Windows

1. Save a copy of your Word document. (This is always a good idea.)

2. Select the equations you want to re-format, or make no selection to re-format the whole document.

3. Choose or click Format Equations to open the Format Equations dialog.

4. Select the equation preferences(See 11.12) you want to use for the equations. If you've set up preferences for this document with the Set Equation Preferences command, the Current document option will be enabled. If you've copied an equation to the clipboard before running this command, Equation on clipboard will be enabled. You can also use the preferences MathType is currently using for new equations, or you can pick an existing MathType equation preferences file. You can see the details of the selected preferences by clicking the Preview… button, which opens the Preview Preferences Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.2).

5. Check the Use for new equations checkbox to use the selected preferences for new equations inserted into this document. This is equivalent to using the Set Equation Preferences command as well. (If you've chosen the Current document option, then this is redundant.)

6. Click OK and the formatting process will start. Word's status bar displays a count of the number of equations processed, and when the process has completed a dialog will display a summary.

See Also

Format Equations Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.8)

6.1.2.10 Converting Equations

The Convert Equations command enables you to convert equations in a Word document into a variety of formats. You can choose to convert MathType and Equation Editor equations, Word EQ formulas, Word 2007 (OMML) equation images, and MathType translated text equations into MathType 6 equations or text equations.

OMML (Office Math Markup Language) equation images are created when a document is created in Word 2007-2013, the document includes equations created with the OMML equation editor, and the document is subsequently saved in Compatibility Mode (i.e., as a doc file).

MathType text equations are equations translated into a text representation using the steps outlined in Working With TeX(See 7.2.4) or Working With MathML(See 7.2.3). These equations can be converted back into MathType equations, or translated into yet another text equation, provided that both the translator name and the MathType data are preserved within the equation. If just the MathType data is preserved, the text can be pasted into a MathType window.

106 MathType for Windows inevitably cause display problems as well. Running this command converts and reformats the equations, solving these problems. You should also use this command after opening a document containing OMML equation images.

See Also

Converting Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.1.2.11)

6.1.2.11 Converting Equations Step-by-Step

To convert equations in a Word document, follow these steps:

1. Save a copy of your Word document just in case you don't like the results; a conversion of many equations is not easy to undo.

2. Select the equations you wish to convert, or make no selection to scan the entire document.

3. Use the Convert Equations command to open the Convert Equations Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.9).

4. Select the equation types to convert from, and to convert to. If necessary, select the desired translator. If using a translator, turn on the Include translator name as comment and Include MathType data as comment options if you might want to convert these equations again.

5. Select the Prompt before converting each equation option if you want to choose which equations to convert and which to skip.

Click OK and the conversion process will begin. Feedback about the progress of the command is displayed in Word's status bar. When the command has finished a dialog displays the number of equations converted.

6.1.2.12 Exporting Equations

The Export Equations command allows you to export MathType and Equation Editor equations in your Word document to individual graphics files. This can be useful when importing a Word document into a desktop publishing application.

One file will be created for each equation in the document. You can choose the format of the files: EPS(See 5.4.1), Windows Metafile (WMF)(See 5.4.3) or GIF(See 5.4.2) . The files are numbered sequentially, starting with any number you choose, and you can define the underlying pattern, e.g., Physics001.eps, Physics002.eps, etc. You can also choose to replace each exported equation in the document with the name of its corresponding file, e.g., <>.

See Also

Exporting Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.1.2.13)

107 MathType for Windows

6.1.2.13 Exporting Equations Step-by-Step

To export equations from a Word document, follow these steps:

1. Save a copy of your Word document (this is always a good idea).

2. Select the equations you wish to export, or make no selection to export all equations in the document.

3. Use the Export Equations command to open the Export Equations Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.10).

4. Enter the name of the folder in which you want to create the exported equation files. You can either type in the name of a folder (it doesn't have to exist), or click Browse… and select an existing folder.

5. Check the Delete all files of same type in folder option if you want to delete all existing files in the folder with the same extension. This can be very useful, but be careful you've chosen the correct folder!

6. Choose the export format from the list. The format determines the file extension that will be used.

7. Select a pattern for the filenames, and the starting number. The pattern must contain at least one '#' character. The # characters are replaced by a sequential number to make every filename unique. Use multiple # characters if you want the numbers to have leading zeros (this will make them display in a more natural order in sorted lists). For example, with the pattern Eqn### and a starting value of 5, the first EPS file exported will be Eqn005.eps, then Eqn006.eps and so on. The # characters don't limit the maximum number, so the above pattern can generate filenames such as Eqn1000.eps if there are this many equations in the document.

8. Check the Replace equation with file name option if you want the equations in the document replaced with the name of the corresponding file, e.g., <>.

9. Choose the Whole document or Current selection option based on how much of the document you want to export from, and what you did in Step 2.

Click OK to start the exporting process. Word's status bar will show the progress, and once the process has completed a summary is displayed.

6.1.2.14 Creating Web Pages with MathPage

MathType's MathPage technology enables you to convert a Word document containing equations, equation numbers and equation references into a web page. The page will look virtually the same in your browser as it does in Word. Inline equations will be correctly aligned, display equations will be properly centered, and all equations will display and print as well as from Word itself. This is true for all of the major browsers, running on Windows, Macintosh and Linux/Unix platforms.

108 MathType for Windows

Tips for Better Web pages

The following tips will help you create better web pages using MathPage. o Use tables for alignment Tabs do not work well in browsers for aligning items on multiple lines. If you need a specific layout use Word's tables. Word's Convert Text To Table command on the Table menu greatly simplifies converting existing tab-aligned paragraphs to Tables. After converting to a table, select each column of the table and select Left, Right, or Center alignment to achieve the equivalent result as a Left, Right, or Center tab.

Note: An alternative to using tables is to use Word's column formatting. Set up the document as a 2-column document, for example, instead of using a 2-column table. If you're unfamiliar with using columns in Word, refer to Word Help. o Use the MathType Commands for Word to insert equations This is especially true for display equations that you want centered in a paragraph. MathPage does a good job of handling the various ways that you can center an equation and generating the correct HTML, but it works most reliably if you use MathType's Insert Display Equation and Insert Numbered Display Equation commands in Word. o Use Word's Insert Symbol command for mathematical symbols This is far more efficient than creating a MathType equation containing only a few symbols, both for Word and the browser. On the other hand, you must insert an equation if you want a MathZoom version of the symbol to pop up in the browser when the symbol is clicked. This is especially useful when using small, hard-to-read characters such as superscripts, subscripts, primes etc. o Don't convert long documents; break them into smaller pieces While a large document may be desirable in Word for editing and printing, it does not translate well into a Web document. Large documents take longer to download, and are more cumbersome for viewing. When you print a long document in Word you get headers and footers inserted on every page. Printing from a browser is different; there are no headers and footers contained in the page itself, and page breaks can occur in the strangest places, sometimes breaking graphics such as equations in half. These problems can be minimized by breaking long documents into smaller sections, and making each one an individual web page. o Don't use positioned or floating elements containing equations MathPage currently ignores these items, and although they do get converted into HTML any symbols and equations in these elements will not be handled properly. You can use simple left or right alignment on graphics and other elements to achieve proper display in the browser. o Update equations before using MathPage You can use documents containing equations created by other versions of MathType or Equation Editor (including documents authored on a Macintosh computer). In these cases, for best results you should run the Convert Equations command before generating a web page (you only need to run it once and then save the document).

109 MathType for Windows o Check the support section of our website regularly. The Technical Notices on the support section of our website contains known issues with some browsers and platforms, and also contains more tips for creating documents in Word that will convert into web pages.

See Also

Publish to MathPage Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.11)

Publishing to MathPage Step-by-Step(See 6.1.2.15)

6.1.2.15 Publishing to MathPage Step-by-Step

To publish a Word document to a web page using MathType's MathPage technology, follow these steps:

1. Save your Word document.

2. Choose the Publish to MathPage command from Word's MathType toolbar, menu or Ribbon tab.

3. Edit the Title as necessary. It will appear in the browser's title bar.

4. Choose the File Name for the web page. The default is to save it in the same folder as the Word document, but with an extension that depends on the choice you make in the Equations group (see #6 below). You can either type in the name of the file or click Browse… and choose it in the Save dialog.

5. If you'd like to view the page once it's been generated, check the Display in default browser checkbox.

6. Now you must decide how you want the document's equations displayed in the browser. MathML is a great option, but there are some considerations (see note below). If you wish to use MathML, select MathML using and choose a MathML target from the list. A brief description is displayed in the dialog for the selected target; for a more detailed description of the MathML targets, see the next topic(See 6.1.2.16). If you're not using MathML, you should choose Use images (GIFs). If you choose images, you can also turn on MathZoom, which allows equations in the web page to be magnified by clicking on them. If you're using MathML and the person reading your web page is using Internet Explorer with MathPlayer, MathZoom is turned on automatically.

Note: You can read more detailed information about MathML in the next section, Publishing to MathPage using MathML(See 6.1.2.16).

7. If you're using GIFs, choose the target browser; if you're using MathML, MathType will make the appropriate browser choice automatically. Select the Internet Explorer 6 or newer (Windows) option if you know your web page will only be viewed by people using such a browser. The page will be smaller, particularly if it contains many mathematical symbols. Otherwise, choose the All browsers option.

110 MathType for Windows

8. The settings for this web page will be saved in the Word document, and displayed in the dialog if you run this command again. You can also use these settings (other than Title and File Name) as the default values for other web pages by checking the Use settings as defaults checkbox.

9. Click OK to generate the web page. You'll see a progress dialog appear, and when the page has been generated it will open up in your default browser (if you selected this option).

10. You may notice MathType has also generated a supporting files folder, with a similar name to what you named the file. For example, if your MathPage file name is deriving_limits.xht, MathType will create a folder named deriving_limits_files, and will save it to the same location as your MathPage. a. If you're using GIFs, you'll always need to upload both the folder and the MathPage, because the folder is where MathType saves the images for each of the equations in the MathPage. There is also a file named mathpage.js. You'll need to upload this file with your MathPage as well. If there are several MathPages on your website, you only need to upload mathpage.js once in every folder that contains a MathPage that uses GIFs. b. If you're using MathML, often you can get by with simply uploading the file itself, and not worrying about the supporting files folder. The safe thing to do though, is to upload both the file and the folder. c. If your MathML target choice was Multi-browser (UMSS), there will be 2 additional files saved at the same level (i.e., in the same folder) as your MathPage. These files are named pmathml.xsl and pmathmlcss.xsl. You must upload these files with your MathPage, and keep them at the same level as your MathPage. If there are several MathPages on your website, you only need to upload these 2 xsl files once in every folder that contains a MathPage.

You should examine the web page and if you find any problems, modify the original Word document and run this command again. It's generally best not to edit the MathPage itself. The Technical Notices in our support section of our website also contains updated advice on creating the best possible web pages.

6.1.2.16 Publishing to MathPage using MathML

Although browser support for MathML has greatly improved, there are some different approaches to producing a web page containing MathML. MathPage supports several targets, described below, that differ in the number and type of browsers that can display the page. We recommend the XHTML+MathJax target or XHTML+MathML in most cases.

HTML+MathJax

If you're targeting an audience with the latest and greatest browsers, the XHTML target (next bullet) is probably a better choice. If you're not sure, then this one should work in most all situations. Valid file extensions are .htm and .html; default is .htm.

111 MathType for Windows

XHTML+MathJax

All other things being equal, this is the preferred target to use. If your browser (and that of your audience) supports HTML5 or XHTML, and/or if your workflow involves ebooks, this is the clear choice. This should work in most browsers on mobile devices also. Valid file extensions are .xht, .xhtml, and .xml. Default is .xht.

XHTML+MathML

This target generates the preferred cross-platform MathML format, an XHTML page containing MathML. For the pages to display properly in Internet Explorer for Windows, your audience will need MathPlayer 2.0 or newer installed. For more details please visit the MathPlayer website . This format will work with most of the latest-release browsers, but if you find it doesn't work for some of your audience, you should try one of the MathJax targets above. Valid file extensions are .xht, .xhtml, and .xml. Default is .xht.

MathPlayer (IE behavior)

MathPlayer is our MathML display engine for Internet Explorer 6 or newer on Windows only. Choose this target if your audience will be using only this browser, or will be using assistive technology to have the MathPage read aloud. In most cases, for more flexibility we recommend the XHTML+MathJax target. For more details please visit the MathPlayer website . Valid file extensions are .htm, .html, .shtm, .shtml, and .stm. Default is .htm.

Multi-browser (UMSS)

The inclusion of the 2 MathJax targets described above has all but eliminated the need to use the Multi-browser (UMSS) MathPage target. If you choose one of the MathJax targets and find a good number of your audience is using an older browser that may not display the MathJax equations properly, or if they have JavaScript disabled, this general-use target should work. The Universal MathML Stylesheet (UMSS) is an XSLT stylesheet that permits a single web page containing MathML to be displayed in a variety of different browsers. It detects the current browser in use, and whether it has built-in support for MathML or whether a plug-in such as MathPlayer or techexplorer is available. It then makes the necessary adjustments to the content. It even uses CSS to format equations if no MathML renderer is available. This universality comes at the expense of a slight delay in displaying the document, and the need to distribute a couple of extra files with the web page (pmathml.xsl and pmathmlcss.xsl). For more details please see http://www.w3.org/math/xsl . Valid file extensions are .xht, .xhtml, and .xml. Default is .xht.

See Also

MathML website

6.1.2.17 Typing TeX Directly Into Word (Toggle TeX)

Toggle TeX

112 MathType for Windows

 To enter an Inline Equation, the Texvc must be delimited as: $...$  To enter a Display Equation, the Texvc must be delimited as: \[...\]  To convert a single equation, first select it (by clicking it once with the mouse) OR place the cursor near it in the same line. Then either:

1. Click the Toggle TeX icon in the Publish group of the Ribbon's MathType tab:

2. Type Alt+\  To convert all equations in a region of a document, select the region, and follow one of the two steps above. Note the Toggle TeX command will convert all equations found in the highlighted region regardless of whether they are Texvc or MathType equations, so if you select a mix of both MathType and Texvc equations and toggle, the result will again be a mix.

6.1.2.18 Reference: MathType Dialogs in Word

In This Chapter Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.1) Preview Preferences Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.2) Insert Equation Reference Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.3) Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.4) Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.5) Insert Equation Number Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.6) Format Equation Number Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.7) Format Equations Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.8) Convert Equations Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.9) Export Equations Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.10) Publish to MathPage Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.11) MathType Options Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.12) MathType Paste Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.13)

6.1.2.18.1 Set Equation Preferences Dialog

Use this dialog to set and/or view the equation preferences(See 11.12) (styles, sizes, and spacing settings) used for new equations you insert into the current document. The

113 MathType for Windows preferences are used only for equations inserted using the commands on the MathType Menu (MathType Menu(See 6.2.2.2), MathType Tab in Microsoft Word(See 6.1.2.2)), MathType Toolbar(See 6.2.2.3), or the MathType Tab in Word 2007-2013(See 6.1.2.2).

MathType's 'New Equation' preferences

Choose this option to use MathType's new equation preferences(See 11.29) each time you insert a new equation, instead of the equation preferences (if any) of the current document.

This document's equation preferences

Choose this option to use equation preferences in the current document when you insert a new equation. If you have not yet set these preferences, the Load Preferences dialog will be displayed (see Load from MathType Preference File… below), allowing you to set them.

Load from MathType Preference File…

Click this button to set the equation preferences using a MathType preference file previously created using MathType's Save Equation Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.25).

Preview…

Click this button to view the preferences that will be used for new equations. See the Preview Preferences Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.2).

6.1.2.18.2 Preview Preferences Dialog

This dialog displays a list of equation preferences. The preferences are displayed as a list of items and values, as set using MathType's Define Styles(See 8.4.6), Define Sizes(See 8.4.4), and Define Spacing(See 8.4.5) dialogs.

See Also

Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.1)

Format Equations Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.8)

6.1.2.18.3 Insert Equation Reference Dialog

This dialog appears when you insert an equation reference using the Insert Equation Reference command on the MathType Menu (MathType Menu(See 6.2.2.2), MathType Tab in Microsoft Word(See 6.1.2.2)), MathType Toolbar(See 6.2.2.3), or the MathType Tab in Word 2007-2013(See 6.1.2.2).

To insert an equation reference at the current location of the insertion point, click OK and then double-click the equation number that you wish to reference. You can scroll the document to bring the desired equation number into view if necessary. After double-clicking an equation number, the document will scroll back to the location where the equation reference was inserted.

114 MathType for Windows

If you are inserting references that aren't very close to the original equations, you can avoid a lot of scrolling backwards and forwards by splitting the Word window into two panes. Then you can insert the references in one pane, and double-click the equation numbers in the other.

Check the Don't show me this again option if you do not wish to see this dialog every time you insert an equation reference. You can also control whether this dialog appears by checking or clearing the Alert when inserting equation references checkbox in the Format Equation Numbers dialog.

6.1.2.18.4 Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog

This dialog allows you to insert a chapter/section break(See 11.3) , which defines the chapter and/or section numbers for this portion of the document. These numbers will be displayed in all equation numbers up to the next chapter/section break. The equation number format in use determines the actual display, e.g., whether the Chapter number is displayed.

The break simply resets the chapter and/or section number. If your document doesn't contain multiple chapters then ignore the chapter portion of the dialog. If your document contains multiple chapters and/or multiple sections, you'll normally want to increment the numbers, as described below. And when you start a new chapter, you'll usually want to reset the section number back to 1.

Chapter

Choose the New Chapter option to define the chapter number. Once selected, you can choose the Next chapter number option to increment the chapter number by 1, or choose the Chapter number option and enter the desired number. If you aren't using chapters and chapter numbers, you can ignore this option and leave it turned off.

Section

These options work similarly to the chapter options. Choose the Next section number option to increment the section number by 1, or choose the Section number option and enter the desired number (or letter) in the box provided.

See Also

Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.5)

6.1.2.18.5 Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog

This dialog allows you to change the chapter and/or section number for the portion of the document containing the insertion point. As an aid, the chapter/section break(See 11.3) that indicates the beginning of the section will be selected and, if necessary, the document will be scrolled to bring the break into view.

This dialog is identical to the Insert Chapter/Section Break dialog, with the addition of a Delete button. The dialog's options reflect the breaks' chapter and section number values.

115 MathType for Windows

Chapter

Section

Delete

Click this button to remove the selected chapter/section break(See 11.3), effectively merging the current chapter/section with the previous one (if one exists).

See Also

Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.4)

6.1.2.18.6 Insert Equation Number Dialog

This dialog appears the first time you insert an equation number into a document, if you have not already inserted a chapter/section break. An equation chapter/section break lets you define the chapter and/or section number part of an equation number, for example the 2 in the equation number (2.3).

If you click OK, an equation section break will be inserted at the start of the document, using the numbers you specify, and then an equation number will be inserted at the current location of the insertion point. If you prefer, you can click Cancel and then insert an equation section break at the location you desire. In this case you will have to choose the Insert Equation Number command again.

This dialog will not appear once you have inserted an equation section break, or if you have selected an equation number format that does not include a chapter or section number. Check the Always start new documents with chapter 1, section 1 option if you do not wish to see this dialog the first time you insert an equation number into a document. You can also control whether this dialog appears by checking or clearing the Alert when inserting first equation number checkbox in the Format Equation Numbers dialog.

See Also

Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.4)

Format Equation Number Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.7)

116 MathType for Windows

6.1.2.18.7 Format Equation Number Dialog

This dialog lets you set the format for new equation numbers or change the format of existing equation numbers.

Number Format

This section lets you specify a number format. The Simple Format option lets you pick the enclosure, separator and format of each part of the number. All parts are optional; use the checkbox next to each part to include/exclude it from the number. The Preview shows you an example using your format.

If you want more control over the format you can choose the Advanced Format option, and then enter the desired format in the Format edit box. All characters in the format are used literally, except for the terms #C, #S and #E. These correspond to the Chapter, Section and Equation parts of the number (and can be in any order). Each of these terms must be followed by another character indicating the numeric format; these correspond to the choices in the menus and are as follows:

1 Numeric 1, 2, 3, …

A Alphabetic A, B, C, …

a alphabetic a, b, c, …

I Roman I, II, III, …

i roman i, ii, iii, …

Thus the format (#C1:#S1-#Ei) would generate the number (1:1-i). The Preview updates as you make changes to the format. A useful tip is to use the Simple Format option to get the format as close as possible to the desired format, then choose the Advanced Format option and make the final changes.

Change the equation number format for

Options in this section control which equation numbers are affected by the settings in this dialog. Choose New equation numbers to affect new equation numbers created with the Insert Equation Number command. Choose Current selection or Whole document to update existing equation numbers.

Options o Update equation numbers automatically Whenever you insert an equation number or an equation reference into a document, all of the existing equation numbers and references are updated so that the numbering sequences are correct. Typically this operation doesn't take very long, but if you are running on a slower computer, or you are working on a large document, then this process

117 MathType for Windows

may start taking a while. If so, you can turn off this option, which prevents the update from automatically taking place.

If you turn off automatic updating, you must manually update the numbers using the Update Equation Numbers command. You must also use this command if you move or delete an equation number, as the automatic updating doesn't occur in these situations.

Note: Depending on the options you've set in Word, the equation numbers may automatically update when you print the document. If you have a lot of equation numbers and it's taking a long time before printing starts, this may be why. Look for a setting titled "Update fields before printing" in Word Options. o Alert when inserting first equation number The first time an equation number is inserted into a document, the document is checked to make sure it contains an initial chapter/section break(See 11.3). If it doesn't, the default behavior is to present a dialog asking for the starting chapter and section numbers. If you uncheck this option, starting values of 1 will be inserted without the dialog appearing. o Alert when inserting equation references When an equation reference is inserted into a document, the default behavior is to present a dialog that reminds you to double-click an equation number to actually insert the reference. If you uncheck this option, this dialog will no longer appear. o Use format as default for new documents Check this option if you want to use the current format as the default for all new documents. The first time you insert an equation number into a new document, the format is saved with the document. This means that the default format only affects documents that haven't had equation numbers inserted.

See Also

Insert Equation Number Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.6)

Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.4)

6.1.2.18.8 Format Equations Dialog

This dialog allows you to change the formatting of all MathType, Equation Editor, and Word EQ field equations in the chosen range. It applies the equation preferences(See 11.12) (styles, sizes, spacing) you choose to all equations in the current selection or the entire document.

Note that Equation Editor equations and Word EQ fields will be converted to MathType equation objects by this operation. If you do not want this to happen, you must choose a range that omits them.

Format equations using preferences from:

Use this section to select how you want the equations to look by selecting equation preferences(See 11.12) that will be used in the formatting operation.

118 MathType for Windows o Current document Choose this option if you want to use the current document's equation preferences. This option will only be available if you have set the equation preferences for the document. See the Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.1). o MathType's 'New Equation' preferences Choose this option if you want to use the preferences MathType is currently configured to use for new equations(See 11.29). o Equation on clipboard Choose this option to reformat the equations to have the same format as an existing equation. In preparation for using this option, copy the equation on which you want to base the formatting to the clipboard(See 11.6) . The equation may be in the current document, any other document, or in a MathType equation window. This option will only be available if there is an equation on the clipboard. o MathType preference file Choose this option to format the equations based on the equation preferences you have previously saved in a file using the Save to File… command on MathType's Equation Preferences menu. Use the Browse button to locate the file. o Use for new equations Check this box to use the selected equation preferences for new equations you create in this document. o Preview Click this button to view the style, size and spacing definitions you've selected. See the Preview Preferences Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.2).

Range

These options allow you to choose the range within the document in which equations will be formatted: Whole document will format all equations in the document, while Current selection will only format those equations in the current selection.

6.1.2.18.9 Convert Equations Dialog

The Convert Equations dialog is used to convert equations in your document between various equation types. This is useful, for example, when you want to convert some or all of the Equation Editor equations in a Word document into MathType equations, or to convert graphic equations into a text-based language, such as TeX(See 11.41) or MathML(See 11.28), for which there is a MathType Translator available.

Equation types to convert:

Only the equation types checked in this group will be converted. The equation types that can be converted are:

119 MathType for Windows

 Microsoft Word EQ fields These are equation fields inserted using Word's Insert Field command. Prior to the introduction of Equation Editor with Word for Windows 2.0, this was the only way to insert mathematical equations into Word documents.  MathType translator text equations This is any equation created using a MathType Translator (which creates text-based equation formats such as TeX(See 11.41) or MathML(See 11.28)). In order for this option to work the equations must contain both MathType and translator information. This information is included by MathType when you turn on the Include translator name in translation and Include MathType data in translation options in MathType's Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2), and when you turn on the equivalent options in the Convert equations to group in this dialog.  Word 2007 (OMML) equations Word 2007 introduced a new equation editor that utilizes the Office Math Markup Language (OMML). This dialog option converts OMML equations into MathType equations or into text, as selected in the Convert equations to group in this dialog. This feature is not available in all versions of Word.

You must select at least one equation type, or no equations will be converted.

Range

These options allow you to choose the range within the document in which equations will be converted: Whole document will convert all equations in the document, while Current selection will only convert those equations in the current selection.

Prompt before converting each equation

Check this option to be prompted before each equation is converted. This gives you an opportunity to skip equations you do not want to convert.

Convert equations to

Options in this section allow you to specify the type of equation to which to convert.

 MathType equations (OLE objects) This will result in normal MathType graphic equation objects.  Text using MathType translator This will result in each equation being converted to plain text using the currently selected translator.

The other options in this section allow you to choose the translator and to determine whether MathType's internal data gets included in the translation. If you convert equations to text using one of the translators, and think you might want to convert them to another format in the future, turn on the Include translator name as a comment and Include MathType data as a comment options. See the Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2) for more details.

Convert

Click this button to convert all equations that match the given criteria.

120 MathType for Windows

6.1.2.18.10 Export Equations Dialog

This dialog allows you to export the MathType (and Equation Editor) equations in your Word document to individual graphics files. This can be useful when importing a Word document into a desktop publishing application.

Export To

You can type in the name and location of the folder into which you want to export the equation files, or you can choose an existing location using the Browse… button.

If you're continually exporting files to the same folder, it can be useful to have it cleaned out before the export begins. The Delete all files of same type in folder option is provided for this purpose. However, be careful that you've chosen the correct folder or you may delete files you didn't mean to delete!

File Format

This section lets you choose a File type, a File name pattern, and the First number with which to begin numbering files. The number gets incremented for each exported equation, and inserted into the file name in place of the # characters in the pattern. For example, with the pattern Eqn### and a starting value of 5, the first EPS file exported will be Eqn005.eps, then Eqn006.eps and so on. Using multiple # characters helps in making all file names the same minimum length, which causes them to display in the correct sequence when sorted. Select Replace equation with file name to replace each equation with its filename enclosed in double angle brackets, e.g., <>.

Range

These options allow you to choose the range within the document from which equations will be exported: Whole document will export all equations in the document, while Current selection will only export those equations in the current selection.

See Also

Exporting Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.1.2.13)

6.1.2.18.11 Publish to MathPage Dialog

This dialog allows you to convert a Word document to a web page in which the equations display and print properly. Creating Pages with MathPage(See 6.1.2.16) contains additional information about this feature. We strongly recommend that you read it first. It explains the process more fully, and contains many tips for creating great web pages. Document

This section lets you set the Title of the web page and its File Name. Display in default browser will open the generated page in your default Web browser after the generation process has completed.

121 MathType for Windows

Equations

In this section you can choose how equations will be represented in the web page: either as GIF(See 5.4.2) images or using MathML(See 11.28).

Use images (GIFs)

If you choose Use images (GIFs), a set of GIF files is created for every equation (and some symbols). When the page is viewed in a browser, dynamic HTML is used to select the appropriate image depending on the resolution of the monitor. This makes the size of the equation more closely match the size of the surrounding text. A high-resolution image is used when the page is printed, again making the equation match the rest of the document. You can also choose to use our MathZoom technology, which zooms (magnifies) equations when you click on them, allowing you to see clearly subscripts, superscripts, hats and primes.

MathML using

Equations can also be represented as MathML. MathML is a World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) specified language for expressing mathematics (for more details visit their website at http://www.w3.org/math ). There are several different ways it can be used, depending upon the browser and/or plug-in that you and your audience are using. When you select MathML using, the dialog contains a list of MathML "targets" from which you can choose. A page generated for a given MathML target may not display properly when viewed in another browser or without the required plug-in being installed.

These are the 5 MathML targets. You can read full descriptions of each target in Publishing to MathPage using MathML(See 6.1.2.16), but here are some brief suggestions about when and why to choose one over another: o HTML+MathJax. If you're targeting an audience with the latest and greatest browsers, the XHTML target (next bullet) is probably a better choice. If you're not sure, then this one should work in most all situations. o XHTML+MathJax. All other things being equal, this is the preferred target to use. If your browser (and that of your audience) supports HTML5 or XHTML, and/or if your workflow involves ebooks, this is the clear choice. This should work in most browsers on mobile devices also. o XHTML+MathML. This target has the same advantages as the previous target, but will work in browsers that either don't support JavaScript, or browsers in which the user has disabled JavaScript. o MathPlayer (IE behavior). If you know your audience is using Internet Explorer and/or will be using assistive technology to read the web page, this is the best target. o Multi-browser (UMSS). If you find none of the other targets work for you, this target would have the widest possible coverage of browsers and operating systems. It does require uploading 2 supporting files in addition to the MathPage itself. Target Browser

In this section, you can choose the target browser if you're using GIFs. Microsoft's Internet Explorer 6 for Windows and newer can display many symbols correctly, while other browsers

122 MathType for Windows require GIF images to be used for some symbols. If you're sure the audience for your pages will only be using Internet Explorer 6 and newer for Windows, select this choice as the page will download slightly faster. Otherwise choose the All browsers option. If you're using MathML, the proper button for Target Browser will be automatically selected, depending on the MathML target you chose.

We've tested pages generated with MathPage extensively and have compiled helpful information. You can view a list of known issues with various browsers and other MathPage details by searching through our Technical Notices in the support section of our website. Use settings as defaults

Select this item to use the selected settings the first time Export to MathPage is used on any documents in the future. If Export to MathPage has already been used on a document, its previous settings will display and not these defaults.

6.1.2.18.12 MathType Options Dialog

The MathType Options dialog gives you control over how MathML is pasted into a Word document.

Source of MathML

The choices you make on this dialog are active regardless of the source of the MathML. You may have copied MathML from a website, created a handwritten equation in the Windows 7 Math Input Panel (MIP), or you may have chosen a MathML translator in MathType and copied an equation. Each of these actions will place MathML on the clipboard, which is then handled in one of two ways, depending on your choice on the MathType Options dialog.

Create a MathType equation

When you paste MathML into Word or click the Insert button on the MIP, MathType creates a MathType equation from the MathML and places it at the insertion point in Word.

Create an OMML equation

When you choose this option, MathType will create an OMML(See 11.32) equation at the insertion point in Word upon MathML paste or clicking Insert in the MIP.

Prompt on each paste

123 MathType for Windows

After choosing this option, MathType will display the MathType Paste(See 6.1.2.18.13) dialog each time you attempt to insert MathML into Word.

Reset all "Don't show me this again" options

This checkbox is used to reset three settings: o Don't show me this again checkbox in the "Update Equation Numbers" dialog, when updating equation numbers is taking too long. o Don't show me this again checkbox in the "Insert Equation Reference" dialog. o Always start new documents with chapter 1, section 1 checkbox in the "Insert Equation Number" dialog. Although this is not labeled "Don't show me this again", it still gets reset when the "Reset" checkbox is checked in the MathType Options dialog

6.1.2.18.13 MathType Paste Dialog

If the Windows clipboard contains MathML and you attempt to paste it into a Word 2007-2013 document, this dialog will appear unless... o you have chosen the Prompt on each paste on the MathType Options(See 6.1.2.18.12) dialog, or o you have previously made a choice on the MathType Paste dialog and checked the Remember my choice checkbox.

Create a MathType equation

When you paste MathML into Word or click the Insert button on the MIP, MathType creates a MathType equation from the MathML and places it at the insertion point in Word.

Create an OMML equation

When you choose this option, MathType will create an OMML(See 11.32) equation at the insertion point in Word upon MathML paste or clicking Insert in the MIP.

Remember my choice

If you check this box, the MathType Paste dialog will not appear in the future when you paste MathML. To reinstate the behavior of the dialog appearing for each MathML paste, click the dialog launcher in the MathType group(See 6.1.3.2.3) on the Ribbon.

124 MathType for Windows

6.1.3 MathType's Support for Microsoft PowerPoint

In This Chapter Support for Microsoft PowerPoint(See 6.1.3.1) MathType Tab in Microsoft PowerPoint(See 6.1.3.2)

6.1.3.1 Support for Microsoft PowerPoint

MathType adds several commands to Microsoft PowerPoint that you will allow you add equations to your presentation, search for equations, access MathType's help and contact support. See MathType tab in Microsoft PowerPoint(See 6.1.3.2) for more information.

See Also

MathType's Support for Microsoft Word 2007-2013(See 6.1.2)

6.1.3.2 MathType Tab in Microsoft PowerPoint

In This Chapter Insert Equation Group(See 6.1.3.2.1) Browse Group(See 6.1.3.2.2) Help Group(See 6.1.3.2.3)

6.1.3.2.1 Insert Equation Group

Insert Equation

Opens a new MathType window ready for you to enter an equation.

125 MathType for Windows

6.1.3.2.2 Browse Group

Browse

The Browse group allows you to search back and forth through the slides for equations.

6.1.3.2.3 Help Group

MathType Help

Contents and Index...

Opens MathType Help

Using MathType in Word...

Opens MathType's Help for Microsoft Word

Unlock/Register MathType...

Gives you information on how to enter your product key to unlock MathType as well as register your product so you can receive free technical support, upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing.

About MathType...

MathType on the Web

MathType Home Page...

126 MathType for Windows

Opens the MathType home page (e.g. http://www.dessci.com/en for English).

Online Support...

Send Feedback by Email...

Order MathType...

Opens the e-commerce area of the Design Science Web site where you can purchase MathType (or any of our other products).

Future MathType

Opens a page on our website that will allow you to give us your ideas for future enhancements of MathType. 6.2 Office 2002-2003

In This Chapter Microsoft Excel -- pasting a range of cells into MathType(See 6.2.1) MathType's Support for Microsoft Word(See 6.2.2) MathType's Support for Microsoft PowerPoint(See 6.2.3) 6.2.1 Microsoft Excel -- pasting a range of cells into MathType

 A single row of data will result in a single line in MathType -- not a row matrix.  A single column of data will result in a properly-formatted column matrix in MathType.

This may also work in spreadsheets other than Excel, and in word processors and text editors. Follow the link below for more information.

See Also

MathType's Support for Microsoft PowerPoint(See 6.2.3)

6.2.2.2 MathType Menu

The MathType menu added to Word's menu bar contains the complete set of MathType commands for Word. In order to conserve screen space, the MathType Toolbar(See 6.2.2.3) contains only the most frequently used commands, by default. See the Note on the MathType Toolbar(See 6.2.2.3) page for the way to customize the toolbar.

The commands apply to the current document only. The menu contains the following commands:

Set Equation Preferences

This command opens the Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.1), which allows you to specify the equation preferences(See 11.12) to be used for new equations you insert into the document.

Insert Inline Equation Ctrl+Alt+Q

Opens a new MathType window ready for you to enter an equation. If you have defined equation preferences(See 11.12) for new equations (using the Set Equation Preferences

129 MathType for Windows command), these settings will be used in the MathType window. Otherwise MathType's current preferences for new equations(See 11.29) will be used. The resulting equation is inserted inline, i.e., aligned with the surrounding text.

Insert Display Equation Alt+Q

Insert Left-Numbered Display Equation Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Q

Similar to Insert Display Equation, but also inserts a left-aligned equation number before the equation. The MTDisplayEquation style defines the location of the center tab stop.

Insert Right-Numbered Display Equation Alt+Shift+Q

Similar to Insert Display Equation, but also inserts a right-aligned equation number following the equation. The MTDisplayEquation style defines the location of the right margin tab stop.

Open Math Input Panel... Ctrl+Shift+M

Insert an equation by handwriting it in Windows 7's Math Input Panel (MIP). Equation is pasted into MathType when you click the MIP Insert button. This command is not available for versions of Windows earlier than Windows 7.

Toggle MathType/TeX Alt+\

Insert Equation Number

Inserts an equation number at the insertion point. ludes a section number and an equation number. The equation number increments each time you insert a number; you define the section number using the Insert Equation Section Break command. Use the Format Equation Numbers command to set or change the number format.

Insert Equation Reference

130 MathType for Windows

Place the insertion point at the place where you wish to insert the reference, and choose this command (the Insert Equation Reference Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.3) will appear). Next, double- click on the equation number you want to reference (you may have to scroll the document to find the equation).

Insert Next Section Break

Inserts a section break and numbers it by incrementing the number of the previous section break.

Insert Next Chapter Break

Inserts a chapter break and numbers it by incrementing the number of the previous chapter break.

Insert Chapter/Section Break

Opens the Insert Equation Section Break Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.4), which allows you to insert an equation section break. Equation sections define the section number used in equation numbers.

Modify Chapter/Section Break

Opens the Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.5), which allows you to locate and modify the current chapter/section break (the one preceding the current position of the insertion point).

Format Equation Numbers

Opens the Format Equation Numbers Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.7), which allows you to change the format of new and/or existing equation numbers. You can also turn off automatic updating of equation numbers and references in this dialog.

Update Equation Numbers

Updates all equation numbers and equation references in the document, including those in footnotes and endnotes. You need to use this command if you turn off automatic updating in the Format Equation Numbers Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.7), or if you move or delete any equation numbers in your document.

Format Equations

131 MathType for Windows

Opens the Format Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.8), which allows you to change the format of the equations in the current selection or the entire document.

Convert Equations

Opens the Convert Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.9), which allows you to convert equations in your document to a format you specify (including TeX(See 11.41) or MathML(See 11.28)).

Export Equations

Opens the Export Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.10), which allows you to export the equations in your document into individual graphics files.

Publish to MathPage

Opens the Publish to MathPage Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.11), which allows you to export the document as a web page including MathPage technology to handle the equations.

MathType Help

Contents and Index...

Opens MathType Help

Using MathType in Word...

Opens MathType's Help for Microsoft Word

Unlock/Register MathType...

Gives you information on how to enter your product key to unlock MathType as well as register your product so you can receive free technical support, upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing.

About MathType...

MathType on the Web

MathType Home Page...

Opens the MathType home page (e.g. http://www.dessci.com/en for English).

Online Support...

132 MathType for Windows

Send Feedback by Email...

Order MathType...

Opens the e-commerce area of the Design Science Web site where you can purchase MathType (or any of our other products).

Future MathType

Opens a page on our website that will allow you to give us your ideas for future enhancements of MathType.

MathType Options

Opens MathType Options dialog, for setting preferences for pasting MathML into Word.

6.2.2.3 MathType Toolbar

The MathType toolbar contains the most frequently used commands on the MathType menu (MathType Menu(See 6.2.2.2), MathType Tab in Microsoft Word(See 6.1.2.2)), by default. See the Note below on how to add commands to the toolbar. You can hide or show the MathType toolbar by right-clicking in any of Word's toolbars and using the checkbox next to the MathType entry in the list that appears.

The toolbar contains the following commands (refer to the MathType menu (MathType Menu(See 6.2.2.2), MathType Tab in Microsoft Word(See 6.1.2.2)) descriptions for more information about the commands):

Insert Inline Equation Ctrl+Alt+Q

Insert Display Equation Alt+Q

Insert Left-Numbered Display Equation Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Q

Insert Right-Numbered Display Equation Alt+Shift+Q

133 MathType for Windows

Open Math Input Panel... Ctrl+Shift+M

Toggle TeX Alt+\

Insert Equation Number

Insert Equation Reference

Insert Chapter/Section Break

Update Equation Numbers

Publish to MathPage

Browse Equations, Equation Numbers and Chapter Headings

Note: You can add commands to the MathType toolbar using Word's Customize command on the Tools menu. Click on the MathType menu and Ctrl-drag the desired command to the toolbar (if you don't hold down the Ctrl key then the command is moved, not copied). Right-click on the command in the toolbar and choose Default Style to make the icon appear.

6.2.2.4 Inserting MathType Equations

The MathType commands for Word provide six methods for inserting MathType equations into Word documents. These are:

We recommend that you always use one of these commands to insert equations as they work properly with the Using Equation Preferences(See 6.2.2.8) commands that help ensure consistency between the equations in your documents.

134 MathType for Windows

Note: While you can create inline equations consisting of a single symbol, we recommend you use Word's Insert Symbol command instead. Equations have more overhead in the document, and for large documents the difference can be significant.

 Insert display equation (Alt+Q)  Insert inline equation (Crtl+Alt+Q)

135 MathType for Windows

 Insert right-numbered equation (Alt+Shift+Q)  Insert left-numbered equation (Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Q)  Open Math Input Panel (Ctrl+Shift+M)  Toggle MathType/TeX (Alt+\)

There are also keyboard shortcuts for opening an existing equation in MathType for editing. Select the equation to be edited, and use the following:

 Edit equation in-place in the document (Alt+E)  Open equation for editing in a separate MathType window (Alt+O)

6.2.2.5 Numbering Equations

The format of equation numbers in a document is defined using the Format Equation Number Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.7). Equation numbers are comprised of a chapter number, a section number, a separator, an equation number and an enclosure. This allows numbers such as (1.1.1), [I.i], {A.a}, or even Equation 1.1. The chapter number, section number, separator and enclosure are all optional, so you can create equation numbers such as (1.1), 1.1, or just 1 or a.

136 MathType for Windows

numbers and references. If you modify the number format with the MathType 5 or later command, however, a MathType 4 user will not be able to insert equation numbers using the new format. The document will still display and print properly.

See Also

Inserting Equation Numbers and References Step by Step(See 6.2.2.6)

6.2.2.6 Inserting Equation Numbers and References Step-by-Step

To insert equation numbers and references in a Word document, follow these steps.

Note: If you have not set your Chapter/Section breaks the first time you insert an equation number or a numbered equation, the Insert Equation Number Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.6) appears, which allows you to set the chapter/number breaks.

3. Place the insertion point at the desired location and use the Insert Equation Number command to insert an equation number.

137 MathType for Windows

8. The equation number updating that occurs after you insert an equation number is usually very fast. However, you may find this updating takes a while if you are working on a slower computer or on a large document containing many equation numbers and references. The Format Equation Number Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.7) contains an option to turn off automatic updating. After you've finished entering equation numbers, be sure to use the Update Equation Numbers command to refresh the numbering sequence.

6.2.2.7 Browsing by Equations, Equation Numbers and Chapter/Section Breaks

The MathType browse controls allow you to search through your documents for three types of objects:

138 MathType for Windows

6.2.2.8 Using Equation Preferences

To save equation preferences in a document, follow these steps:

1. In MathType, set your desired preferences using the Define Styles(See 8.4.6), Define Sizes(See 8.4.4), and Define Spacing(See 8.4.5) dialogs.

2. Save these preferences as a MathType preference file using the Save Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.25).

3. In Word, open the document and choose the Set Equation Preferences command on the MathType Menu (MathType Menu(See 6.2.2.2), MathType Tab in Microsoft Word(See 6.1.2.2)).

4. In the Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.1) choose the This document's equation preferences option, click the Load from MathType preference file button and select the file you just saved.

5. You can view the preferences by clicking the Preview button.

6. Click OK and the contents of the file will be copied into the Word document (for the curious, they are saved as a custom document property).

6.2.2.9 Format Equations

139 MathType for Windows

Note that Equation Editor equations and Word EQ fields will be converted to MathType equation objects by this operation. If you do not want this to happen, you must choose a range that omits them.

See Also

Format Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.2.2.10)

6.2.2.10 Format Equations Step-by-Step

To re-format the equations in a Word document, follow these steps:

1. Save a copy of your Word document. (This is always a good idea.)

2. Select the equations you want to re-format, or make no selection to re-format the whole document.

3. Choose or click Format Equations to open the Format Equations dialog.

6. Click OK and the formatting process will start. Word's status bar displays a count of the number of equations processed, and when the process has completed a dialog will display a summary.

See Also

Format Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.8)

6.2.2.11 Converting Equations

The Convert Equations command enables you to convert equations in a Word document into a variety of formats. You can choose to convert MathType and Equation Editor equations, Word

140 MathType for Windows

EQ formulas, Word 2007 (OMML) equation images, and MathType translated text equations into MathType 6 equations or text equations.

You should always use this command when opening a document that has been authored or modified on another platform i.e., Macintosh. Although Word does a good job of converting graphics, equations many not display correctly, and font differences between the platforms inevitably cause display problems as well. Running this command converts and reformats the equations, solving these problems. You should also use this command after opening a document containing OMML equation images.

See Also

Converting Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.2.2.12)

6.2.2.12 Converting Equations Step-by-Step

1. Save a copy of your Word document just in case you don't like the results; a conversion of many equations is not easy to undo.

2. Select the equations you wish to convert, or make no selection to scan the entire document.

3. Use the Convert Equations command to open the Convert Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.9).

5. Select the Prompt before converting each equation option if you want to choose which equations to convert and which to skip.

6. Click OK and the conversion process will begin. Feedback about the progress of the command is displayed in Word's status bar. When the command has finished a dialog displays the number of equations converted.

141 MathType for Windows

6.2.2.13 Exporting Equations

See Also

Exporting Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.2.2.14)

6.2.2.14 Exporting Equations Step-by-Step

1. Save a copy of your Word document (this is always a good idea).

2. Select the equations you wish to export, or make no selection to export all equations in the document.

3. Use the Export Equations command to open the Export Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.10).

6. Choose the export format from the list. The format determines the file extension that will be used.

8. Check the Replace equation with file name option if you want the equations in the document replaced with the name of the corresponding file, e.g., <>.

142 MathType for Windows

9. Choose the Whole document or Current selection option based on how much of the document you want to export from, and what you did in Step 2.

10. Click OK to start the exporting process. Word's status bar will show the progress, and once the process has completed a summary is displayed.

6.2.2.15 Creating Web pages with MathPage

Tips for Better Web pages

143 MathType for Windows

headers and footers contained in the page itself, and page breaks can occur in the strangest places, sometimes breaking graphics such as equations in half. These problems can be minimized by breaking long documents into smaller sections, and making each one an individual web page. o Don't use positioned or floating elements containing equations MathPage currently ignores these items, and although they do get converted into HTML any symbols and equations in these elements will not be handled properly. You can use simple left or right alignment on graphics and other elements to achieve proper display in the browser. o Update equations before using MathPage You can use documents containing equations created by other versions of MathType or Equation Editor (including documents authored on a Macintosh computer). In these cases, for best results you should run the Convert Equations command before generating a web page (you only need to run it once and then save the document). o Check the support section of our website regularly. The Technical Notices on the support section of our website contains known issues with some browsers and platforms, and also contains more tips for creating documents in Word that will convert into web pages.

See Also

Publish to MathPage Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.11) Publishing to MathPage Step-by-Step(See 6.2.2.16)

6.2.2.16 Publishing to MathPage Step-by-Step

To publish a Word document to a web page using MathType's MathPage technology, follow these steps:

1. Save your Word document.

2. Choose the Publish to MathPage command from Word's MathType toolbar, menu or Ribbon tab.

3. Edit the Title as necessary. It will appear in the browser's title bar.

5. If you'd like to view the page once it's been generated, check the Display in default browser checkbox.

144 MathType for Windows

of the MathML targets, see the next topic(See 6.1.2.14). If you're not using MathML, you should choose Use images (GIFs). If you choose images, you can also turn on MathZoom, which allows equations in the web page to be magnified by clicking on them. If you're using MathML and the person reading your web page is using Internet Explorer with MathPlayer, MathZoom is turned on automatically.

Note: You can read more detailed information about MathML in the next section, Publishing to MathPage using MathML(See 6.2.2.17).

9. Click OK to generate the web page. You'll see a progress dialog appear, and when the page has been generated it will open up in your default browser (if you selected this option).

You should examine the web page and if you find any problems, modify the original Word document and run this command again. It's generally best not to edit the MathPage itself. The

145 MathType for Windows

Technical Notices in our support section of our website also contains updated advice on creating the best possible web pages.

6.2.2.17 Publishing to MathPage using MathML

HTML+MathJax

XHTML+MathJax

XHTML+MathML

MathPlayer (IE behavior)

Multi-browser (UMSS)

146 MathType for Windows content. It even uses CSS to format equations if no MathML renderer is available. This universality comes at the expense of a slight delay in displaying the document, and the need to distribute a couple of extra files with the web page (pmathml.xsl and pmathmlcss.xsl). For more details please see http://www.w3.org/math/xsl . Valid file extensions are .xht, .xhtml, and .xml. Default is .xht.

See Also

MathML website

6.2.2.18 Typing TeX Directly Into Word (Toggle TeX)

Toggle TeX

1. Select the Toggle MathType / TeX option on the MathType menu

2. Select the Toggle TeX toolbar button:

3. Type Alt+\  To convert all equations in a region of a document, select the region, and follow one of the two steps above. Note the Toggle TeX command will convert all equations found in the highlighted region regardless of whether they are Texvc or MathType equations, so if you select a mix of both MathType and Texvc equations and toggle, the result will again be a mix.

147 MathType for Windows

6.2.2.19 Reference: MathType Dialogs in Word

In This Chapter Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.1) Preview Preferences Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.2) Insert Equation Reference Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.3) Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.4) Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.5) Insert Equation Number Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.6) Format Equation Number Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.7) Format Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.8) Convert Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.9) Export Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.10) Publish to MathPage Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.11)

6.2.2.19.1 Set Equation Preferences Dialog

Use this dialog to set and/or view the equation preferences(See 11.12) (styles, sizes, and spacing settings) used for new equations you insert into the current document. The preferences are used only for equations inserted using the commands on the MathType Menu (MathType Menu(See 6.2.2.2), MathType Tab in Microsoft Word(See 6.1.2.2)), MathType Toolbar(See 6.2.2.3), or the MathType Tab in Word 2007-2013(See 6.1.2.2).

MathType's 'New Equation' preferences

Choose this option to use MathType's new equation preferences(See 11.29) each time you insert a new equation, instead of the equation preferences (if any) of the current document.

This document's equation preferences

Load from MathType Preference File…

Click this button to set the equation preferences using a MathType preference file previously created using MathType's Save Equation Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.25).

Preview…

Click this button to view the preferences that will be used for new equations. See the Preview Preferences Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.2).

148 MathType for Windows

6.2.2.19.2 Preview Preferences Dialog

See Also

Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.1) Format Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.8)

6.2.2.19.3 Insert Equation Reference Dialog

6.2.2.19.4 Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog

149 MathType for Windows

Chapter

Section

See Also

Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.5)

6.2.2.19.5 Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog

This dialog is identical to the Insert Chapter/Section Break dialog, with the addition of a Delete button. The dialog's options reflect the breaks' chapter and section number values.

Chapter

Section

Delete

Click this button to remove the selected chapter/section break(See 11.3), effectively merging the current chapter/section with the previous one (if one exists).

See Also

Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.4)

150 MathType for Windows

6.2.2.19.6 Insert Equation Number Dialog

See Also

Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.4) Format Equation Number Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.7)

6.2.2.19.7 Format Equation Number Dialog

This dialog lets you set the format for new equation numbers or change the format of existing equation numbers.

Number Format

1 Numeric 1, 2, 3, …

151 MathType for Windows

A Alphabetic A, B, C, …

a alphabetic a, b, c, …

I Roman I, II, III, …

i roman i, ii, iii, …

Change the equation number format for

152 MathType for Windows

a dialog that reminds you to double-click an equation number to actually insert the reference. If you uncheck this option, this dialog will no longer appear. o Use format as default for new documents Check this option if you want to use the current format as the default for all new documents. The first time you insert an equation number into a new document, the format is saved with the document. This means that the default format only affects documents that haven't had equation numbers inserted.

See Also

Insert Equation Number Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.6) Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.4)

6.2.2.19.8 Format Equations Dialog

Note that Equation Editor equations and Word EQ fields will be converted to MathType equation objects by this operation. If you do not want this to happen, you must choose a range that omits them.

Format equations using preferences from:

Use this section to select how you want the equations to look by selecting equation preferences(See 11.12) that will be used in the formatting operation. o Current document Choose this option if you want to use the current document's equation preferences. This option will only be available if you have set the equation preferences for the document. See the Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.1). o MathType's 'New Equation' preferences Choose this option if you want to use the preferences MathType is currently configured to use for new equations(See 11.29). o Equation on clipboard Choose this option to reformat the equations to have the same format as an existing equation. In preparation for using this option, copy the equation on which you want to base the formatting to the clipboard(See 11.6) . The equation may be in the current document, any other document, or in a MathType equation window. This option will only be available if there is an equation on the clipboard. o MathType preference file Choose this option to format the equations based on the equation preferences you have previously saved in a file using the Save to File… command on MathType's Equation Preferences menu. Use the Browse button to locate the file.

153 MathType for Windows o Use for new equations Check this box to use the selected equation preferences for new equations you create in this document. o Preview Click this button to view the style, size and spacing definitions you've selected. See the Preview Preferences Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.2).

Range

6.2.2.19.9 Convert Equations Dialog

Equation types to convert:

Only the equation types checked in this group will be converted. The equation types that can be converted are:

 MathType or Equation Editor equations This includes equations created by any version of MathType or Equation Editor. They can be OLE(See 11.31) objects, GIF(See 5.4.2) images, or MathType 1.x macros.  Microsoft Word EQ fields These are equation fields inserted using Word's Insert Field command. Prior to the introduction of Equation Editor with Word for Windows 2.0, this was the only way to insert mathematical equations into Word documents.  MathType translator text equations This is any equation created using a MathType Translator (which creates text-based equation formats such as TeX(See 11.41) or MathML(See 11.28)). In order for this option to work the equations must contain both MathType and translator information. This information is included by MathType when you turn on the Include translator name in translation and Include MathType data in translation options in MathType's Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2), and when you turn on the equivalent options in the Convert equations to group in this dialog.  Word 2007 (OMML) equations Word 2007 introduced a new equation editor that utilizes the Office Math Markup Language (OMML). This dialog option converts OMML equations into MathType equations or into text, as selected in the Convert equations to group in this dialog. This feature is not available in all versions of Word.

154 MathType for Windows

You must select at least one equation type, or no equations will be converted.

Range

Prompt before converting each equation

Check this option to be prompted before each equation is converted. This gives you an opportunity to skip equations you do not want to convert.

Convert equations to

Options in this section allow you to specify the type of equation to which to convert.

Convert

Click this button to convert all equations that match the given criteria.

6.2.2.19.10 Export Equations Dialog

Export To

You can type in the name and location of the folder into which you want to export the equation files, or you can choose an existing location using the Browse… button.

File Format

This section lets you choose a File type, a File name pattern, and the First number with which to begin numbering files. The number gets incremented for each exported equation, and

155 MathType for Windows inserted into the file name in place of the # characters in the pattern. For example, with the pattern Eqn### and a starting value of 5, the first EPS file exported will be Eqn005.eps, then Eqn006.eps and so on. Using multiple # characters helps in making all file names the same minimum length, which causes them to display in the correct sequence when sorted. Select Replace equation with file name to replace each equation with its filename enclosed in double angle brackets, e.g., <>.

Range

See Also

Exporting Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.2.2.14)

6.2.2.19.11 Publish to MathPage Dialog

This dialog allows you to convert a Word document to a web page in which the equations display and print properly. Creating Pages with MathPage(See 6.1.2.14) contains additional information about this feature. We strongly recommend that you read it first. It explains the process more fully, and contains many tips for creating great web pages. Document

This section lets you set the Title of the web page and its File Name. Display in default browser will open the generated page in your default Web browser after the generation process has completed. Equations

In this section you can choose how equations will be represented in the web page: either as GIF(See 5.4.2) images or using MathML(See 11.28).

Use images (GIFs)

MathML using

156 MathType for Windows using, the dialog contains a list of MathML "targets" from which you can choose. A page generated for a given MathML target may not display properly when viewed in another browser or without the required plug-in being installed.

These are the 5 MathML targets. You can read full descriptions of each target in Publishing to MathPage using MathML(See 6.2.2.17), but here are some brief suggestions about when and why to choose one over another: o HTML+MathJax. If you're targeting an audience with the latest and greatest browsers, the XHTML target (next bullet) is probably a better choice. If you're not sure, then this one should work in most all situations. o XHTML+MathJax. All other things being equal, this is the preferred target to use. If your browser (and that of your audience) supports HTML5 or XHTML, and/or if your workflow involves ebooks, this is the clear choice. This should work in most browsers on mobile devices also. o XHTML+MathML. This target has the same advantages as the previous target, but will work in browsers that either don't support JavaScript, or browsers in which the user has disabled JavaScript. o MathPlayer (IE behavior). If you know your audience is using Internet Explorer and/or will be using assistive technology to read the web page, this is the best target. o Multi-browser (UMSS). If you find none of the other targets work for you, this target would have the widest possible coverage of browsers and operating systems. It does require uploading 2 supporting files in addition to the MathPage itself. Target Browser

In this section, you can choose the target browser if you're using GIFs. Microsoft's Internet Explorer 6 for Windows and newer can display many symbols correctly, while other browsers require GIF images to be used for some symbols. If you're sure the audience for your pages will only be using Internet Explorer 6 and newer for Windows, select this choice as the page will download slightly faster. Otherwise choose the All browsers option. If you're using MathML, the proper button for Target Browser will be automatically selected, depending on the MathML target you chose.

157 MathType for Windows

6.2.3 MathType's Support for Microsoft PowerPoint

In This Chapter Support for Microsoft PowerPoint(See 6.2.3.1) Inserting Handwritten Math (Windows 7)(See 6.2.3.2) MathType Menu(See 6.2.3.3) MathType Toolbar(See 6.2.3.4)

6.2.3.1 Support for Microsoft PowerPoint

The MathType Toolbar(See 6.2.3.4) added to PowerPoint 2002 and 2003 contains commands for inserting equations, browsing equations and the MathType Menu(See 6.2.3.3) provides links to MathType's help and website.

The MathType commands for Microsoft PowerPoint are stored in a PowerPoint add-in file. There is a separate add-in file for each version of PowerPoint. MathType Setup installs these files into the Office Support folder inside your MathType folder and configures each version of PowerPoint it detects to load these add-ins at startup.

If you install a new version of PowerPoint after installing MathType, you should run MathType Setup again to install the commands for this new version. This won't affect any of your MathType settings.

If you want to temporarily remove the MathType commands from PowerPoint, choose the Add- Ins command on PowerPoint's Tools menu, select the "MathType AddIn (PowerPoint XX)" item and click the Unload button. The MathType toolbar button will disappear. You can enable the commands by opening this dialog, selecting the same item and clicking the Load button.

If you want to permanently remove the commands from PowerPoint, open the Add-Ins dialog, select the "MathType AddIn (PowerPoint XX)" item and click the Remove button.

See Also

MathType's Support for Microsoft Word(See 6.1.2)

MathType Toolbar for PowerPoint(See 6.2.3.4)

MathType Menu for PowerPoint(See 6.2.3.3)

6.2.3.2 Inserting Handwritten Math (Windows 7)

There is no direct support for the Windows 7 Math Input Panel (MIP) in PowerPoint, but it is still possible to use the MIP and MathType together to insert handwritten math in PowerPoint by following these steps:

158 MathType for Windows

1. In PowerPoint, choose the Insert Equation command from either the toolbar or the MathType menu.

2. In MathType's Edit menu, choose the Open Math Input Panel... command.

3. After you write your equation in the MIP, click the Insert button, and the equation will be pasted into MathType.

4. Close the MathType window and the equation will be placed on your PowerPoint slide.

6.2.3.3 MathType Menu

Insert Equation

Opens a new MathType window ready for you to enter an equation.

MathType Help

Contents and Index...

Opens MathType Help

Using MathType in Word...

Opens MathType's Help for Microsoft Word

Unlock/Register MathType...

Gives you information on how to enter your product key to unlock MathType as well as register your product so you can receive free technical support, upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing.

About MathType...

MathType on the Web

MathType Home Page...

Opens the MathType home page (e.g. http://www.dessci.com/en for English).

Online Support...

159 MathType for Windows

Send Feedback by Email...

Order MathType...

Opens the e-commerce area of the Design Science Web site where you can purchase MathType (or any of our other products).

Future MathType

Opens a page on our website that will allow you to give us your ideas for future enhancements of MathType.

6.2.3.4 MathType Toolbar

Insert Equation

Opens a new MathType window ready for you to enter an equation.

Browse Equations

Browse allows you to search back and forth through the slides for equations.

160 MathType for Windows

7. Using MathType with Applications and Websites

In This Chapter Math Everywhere and Anywhere(See 7.1) General Techniques(See 7.2)

7.1 Math Everywhere and Anywhere

MathType works with many Windows applications. These include word processing, presentation, email, calculation, elearning products, and more. Some of the most popular are:

 Adobe InDesign  Gmail  Maple  Mathcad  Mathematica  MATLAB  Microsoft Office  Moodle  OpenOffice  Wikipedia

To see the entire list of over 600 applications and websites that MathType works with, go to our MathType Application and Website Compatibility Database . There you'll find updates and information about using MathType with hundreds of other applications and websites. We are constantly adding support for new applications and websites, and instructions for working with existing applications are updated as new versions are released. We also welcome suggestions for applications and websites you would like to see us support. Email us at [email protected] with suggestions.

For help on using MathType with these applications and websites, see Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2).

MathType can be used with many applications and websites for which we do not yet have specific instructions. For these, see General Techniques(See 7.2).

161 MathType for Windows 7.2 General Techniques

In This Chapter Working With Insert Object(See 7.2.1) Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2) Working With MathML(See 7.2.3) Working With TeX(See 7.2.4) Translation Issues(See 7.2.5) Creating a New Translator(See 7.2.6) Working With Equation Image Files(See 7.2.7) Working With Web Pages(See 7.2.8) 7.2.1 Working With Insert Object

Insert Object (OLE)

Many Windows applications support Object Linking and Embedding (OLE(See 11.31)). Most of them have an Insert Object command (or an Object… command on its Insert menu or elsewhere). If your application doesn't have such a command, look up Object Linking and Embedding or OLE in the index of its user documentation. The Insert Object command brings up a dialog containing a list of all the kinds of objects that may be inserted. Simply choose "MathType 6.9 Equation" and MathType will open an equation editing window. Create your equation, close the window when you are done, and the new equation will appear in the document. Any time you want to edit the equation, just double-click it. If your favorite application does not support OLE, request it from the vendor. Most software vendors like to get feedback from their customers, just like we do. Copy and Paste (or Drag and Drop)

At its core, a MathType equation is a graphical image (but a WMF(See 5.4.3) vector image, rather than a bitmap one, such as GIF(See 5.4.2)). If your application accepts graphics via the Windows clipboard, you can run MathType from the Windows Start menu, create an equation, and paste it into your application. Your application may also support drag and drop(See 5.7.1) but that gives the same result. When using MathType this way, you don't have to restart it for each new equation. Just leave its editing window open for your entire session. When you need to create a new equation, bring the MathType window to the front, choose the Select All command on the Edit menu (Ctrl-A), hit the Delete key to clear out the last equation, and create your new equation ready to paste. Later, if you need to edit an equation, you can usually use Cut or Copy and Paste it back into a MathType editing window. After you make your edits, just copy and paste it over the old one.

162 MathType for Windows

7.2.2 Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog

This dialog allows you to specify what kind of information will be placed on the clipboard(See 11.6) whenever you use the Cut or Copy commands on the Edit menu, or when you drag & drop an equation from the MathType editing window. (For the remainder of this topic, when we use the terms cut, copy, and/or paste, the same behavior applies to drag & drop, but we will not explicitly state such.) Normally, Cut or Copy will place a graphic image of the selected part of the equation onto the clipboard, ready to be pasted into a document. However, using the options in this dialog, you can have the selected equation or fragment translated into text in one of the computer languages or for one of the applications or websites for which a translator is available. Equation object (Windows OLE Graphic)

Click this option to place an equation object on the clipboard. This is the default and is normally used to transfer equation material between one MathType window and another, or between a MathType window and another application, such as a word processor. When you paste an equation into another application's window, how it is handled depends on that application. If the application is OLE(See 11.31)-compatible, it will be treated as a new OLE object. If the application is not OLE-compatible, it will be treated as a graphic image. MathML or TeX:

MathType is supplied with several translators that allow equations to be translated into other computer languages, TeX(See 11.41) and MathML(See 11.28). Click this option to cause MathType to translate the selected equation whenever you use the Cut or Copy command.

Use this listbox to choose from one of the translators currently available to MathType. The text of each list item describes the computer language (or variant) that the translator can translate equations into. In addition to the translators that are installed as part of the MathType product, there may be other translators available from third-party sources. It is also possible to create your own translator or modify an existing one. See Working With MathML(See 7.2.3) and Working With TeX(See 7.2.4) for information on the translators that are installed with MathType. Check the support section of our website for news regarding other translators that may be available and information on creating or modifying translators.

Include translator name in translation

This option instructs the translator software to place the name of the translator in the translation. This is used by MathType's integration with Microsoft Word to allow its Convert Equations command to find the equations in the document. If you are using MathType with a TeX application instead of Word, you should leave this option unchecked. Some translators may ignore this option.

Include MathType data in translation

This option instructs the translator software to place MathType's equation representation in the translation. This allows the equation to be pasted back into MathType for later editing and should normally be checked. Some translators may ignore this option.

163 MathType for Windows

Note: It is possible to paste raw TeX into MathType, and normally MathType will understand it and produce the equation you want, but be aware that if you clear this option, you may not be able to completely edit the resulting text equation in MathType, or convert it back to a MathType equation object using Convert Equations in Word. Therefore, you should use care when clearing this option. Equation for application or website

Many applications and websites accept TeX or MathML, but may mark it up in a special way, or with special delimiters. For example, instead of $\frac{1}{2}$, some applications want [math]\frac{1}{2}[/math]. By selecting the appropriate application or website from this list and copying the equation from MathType, you don't have to worry about specific formats for your favorite applications & sites. See the MathType Application and Website Compatibility Database for information on the translators that are installed with MathType.

See Also

Working With MathML(See 7.2.3) Working With TeX(See 7.2.4) 7.2.3 Working With MathML

Some applications support a standard for using MathML(See 11.28) as an exchange format for Copy and Paste (or drag and drop). The type of MathML used is controlled by choosing one of the MathML translators from the Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2). There may already exist in MathType's list of translators one specifically tailored to your intended target. If not, by experimenting, you may be able to obtain better results with Copy and Paste.

MathML Translators

MathType 6 provides output translators for MathML(See 11.28), a recommendation from the World Wide Web Consortium(See 11.49) for encoding mathematics for the Web. Because MathML is still young, there are differences in the support for MathML in other software. Therefore, MathType 6 includes translators to generate MathML 2.0. These translators are packaged in slightly different ways for the various browsers and browser plug-ins and behaviors that support MathML.

The MathML translators provided with MathType 6 are:

MathML 2.0 (m namespace)

All MathML tags are prefixed with a m: namespace. This style of MathML is used by our MathPlayer behavior for Internet Explorer 6 and newer (Windows only). Pages using this plug- in also require an additional statement linking this namespace to the MathPlayer behavior. See the MathPlayer website for more details.

MathML 2.0 (namespace attr)

This translator generates MathML 2.0 using a namespace attribute on each $tag.$

MathML 2.0 (no namespace)

164 MathType for Windows

This translator generates plain MathML tags with no namespace information. Use this translator when creating pages for use with WebEQ, or with any MathML-enabled browser.

See Also

Publishing to MathPage Step by Step(See 6.2.2.16) W3C MathML Website 7.2.4 Working With TeX

Many web applications that use math represent equations using the TeX typesetting language, because it is easy to type in web forms. However, since there are many dialects and variations of TeX, you will need to choose a compatible MathType translator to use when pasting into such a web application. There may already exist in MathType's list of translators one specifically tailored to your intended target. If not, by experimenting with different TeX translators from the Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2) you may be able to improve the results of Copy and Paste. Because they only use a basic subset of TeX, the Texvc translators are often good choices.

TeX Translators

TeX is a typesetting language invented in the late 1970's by Donald Knuth, a Stanford computer science professor. Although it is a very powerful document processor, especially for documents containing equations, it is also difficult to use. You can think of TeX as a sort of programming language for documents. If you don't get the syntax just right, you get "syntax error" instead of a document.

Here is an example of the TeX language for the quotient rule of differentiation:

\frac{d\left(\frac fg\right)}{dx}(x)=\frac{g(x)\frac{df}{dx}(x)- f(x)\frac{dg}{dx}(x)}{g^2(x)}

Here is how the same equation would appear in MathType:

If you work with TeX, MathType's TeX translators can help you. There are several 'flavors' of TeX, LaTeX being one of the most well-known. MathType includes translators for several of these different versions, check the list in the Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2) for the complete list. Translating Display and Inline Equations

When an equation appears in a document, it can be displayed inline with surrounding text, or it may be centered in a paragraph by itself. Users of MathType in Microsoft Word will already be

165 MathType for Windows familiar with this concept, since MathType's commands for Word use different commands to insert inline and display equations.

TeX also has a notation for inline and display equations, but it works differently. Since TeX is a programming language, the positioning of the equation in the document must be specified in the TeX code for the equation. TeX uses special delimiter characters at the beginning and end of an equation to indicate whether it should be an inline or display equation. Different flavors of TeX use different delimiter characters, but the most common are $...$ for an inline equation and \[...\] for a display equation.

You can control which kind of TeX delimiter will be used when translating a MathType equation. Checking the "Inline Equation" property from MathType's Format menu(See 8.3.5) will cause inline delimiters to be used for translation. Otherwise display delimiters will be used.

When using MathType with Microsoft Word, the Inline Equation property is automatically set when inserting equations via MathType's commands for Word. However, if you later move an equation within your document, you may need to manually update the Inline Equation property for TeX export, or for MathType's Toggle TeX(See 6.1.2.17) feature in Word. Importing TeX Equations

While MathType's TeX translators provide and easy way to export an equation as TeX code, MathType also provides several ways to import a TeX equation.

MathType imports Texvc(See 11.43), subset of TeX supported by Wikipedia. See the help topic Displaying a formula in the MediaWiki handbook for an explanation of this language.

 You can type Texvc directly into MathType. See Using TeX Language Input(See 5.2.4) for details.  If you use Microsoft Word, you can type Texvc directly into the Word editing area, and toggle back and forth between the Texvc view and the MathType view of the equation. See the Toggle TeX(See 6.1.2.17) help for details.

You can import and export Texvc from Wikipedia and other web sites, using copy and paste. More information about this feature can be found in MathType Works With Wikipedia .

See Also

Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2) Typing TeX Directly Into Word 2007-2013 (Toggle TeX)(See 6.1.2.17) Typing TeX Directly Into Word Pre-2007 (Toggle TeX)(See 6.2.2.18) 7.2.5 Translation Issues

Most equation data gets translated appropriately. Some equation data may not have a corresponding construct in some languages, however this is obviously translator-dependent. Still, there are a few equation features and attributes that are not currently translatable:

 Nudging  Color

166 MathType for Windows

 Actual positions of characters, templates, etc.  Dimensions entered in the Define Spacing dialog on the Format menu  Some matrix options; equal rows, equal columns, row alignment  Fence alignment options  Tab-stop type and position 7.2.6 Creating a New Translator

You can create a new translator by modifying an existing translator or from scratch. Either way, you will have to understand the Translator Definition Language (TDL), the language used to define translators. TDL is described in detail in the MathType Translator Programmers Manual, part of the MathType Software Development Kit available on the MathType website.

It is our hope that you and other MathType users will use this information to create translators for other languages and applications and make them available to the MathType community. We are constantly expanding support for using MathType with other applications and web sites. Visit the support section of our website for the latest listing of available translators. Contact Design Science at [email protected] for information on creating a new translator or visit the support section of our website . 7.2.7 Working With Equation Image Files

MathType can also save equations in several graphics formats. For working with desktop publishing applications, Encapsulated PostScript format (EPS(See 5.4.1)) is handy. For putting equations on web pages or working with web-based applications, the GIF(See 5.4.2) format is best. Check with your application's documentation on how to work with graphics files.

To save a MathType equation as an image file, choose Save As from the File menu, and choose the image format from the Save As Type pulldown. When you need to edit an equation, use MathType's Open command on the File menu to open the file. Once you have made your edits, close the window and save changes when asked.

See Also

Working With Files(See 5.4) 7.2.8 Working With Web Pages

If you're interested in creating web pages with equations, follow the links in the See Also section at the bottom of this topic. If you're reading web pages with equations, you need to know there are various techniques for adding math to web pages. Some web authors prefer MathML(See 11.28), some prefer MathJax , others prefer images. So how can you tell which method is being used? Identifying math display

167 MathType for Windows

The best way to tell which method is used to display the math is to start with a right-click. Point to the math expression and click the right mouse button.

MathML

By far, most of the web pages using MathML are read either with Firefox, or with Internet Explorer plus the add-in MathPlayer . When you click the right mouse button, you will see something similar to this:

Firefox Internet Explorer (with MathPlayer)

If you're using Firefox, choose the View MathML Source command, then copy the code & paste it into MathType. If you're using Internet Explorer with MathPlayer, choose the Copy MathML command, then paste it into MathType.

MathJax

All browsers have the same right-click menu for MathJax equations:

All browsers

MathJax equations may be in LaTeX format, or they may be in MathML format. Either way, by clicking Show Source, you can copy the code and paste it into MathType to use the equation in your work.

Images

168 MathType for Windows

If you are using Chrome or Safari browsers, the right-click menu will be similar to that shown for Firefox.

Firefox Internet Explorer

To use equations from the web, there are a couple of techniques to try:

 The image may have "alt text" that MathType can use. In fact, most of the usable equation images on the web fall into this category. To use these equations, click and drag it over to MathType, or select it and copy it, then paste it into MathType. (It's better to use the Ctrl+C shortcut to copy, rather than to use the right-click menu at this point.)  If that doesn't work and you're using Internet Explorer, right-click the equation and choose Copy from the menu. If you're using any other browser, choose Copy Image Location, Copy image URL, Copy Image Address, or similar command. Paste into MathType.

If these techniques don't work, the equation isn't usable by MathType. If this capability is important, it may be worthwhile to contact the editor of the website and mention how important it is to you that the equations be in one of the formats mentioned above.

See Also

Working With Equation Image Files(See 7.2.7) Creating Web Pages with GIF Files(See 4.3.13) Creating Web Pages with Microsoft Word(See 4.3.12) Creating Web Pages with MathPage (Word 2007-2013)(See 6.1.2.16) Creating Web Pages with MathPage (Word 2002-2003)(See 6.1.2.14)

169 MathType for Windows

8. MathType Reference

In This Chapter MathType's command line options(See 8.1) Windows Start Menu(See 8.2) Menus(See 8.3) Dialogs(See 8.4) Keyboard shortcuts(See 8.5) Toolbars(See 8.6)

8.1 MathType's command line options

The MathType command line can consist of a mixture of options and equation files to be opened. If the file name contains special characters (e.g. spaces), enclose it in double- quotation marks. If the file is a MathType preference file, it will be used to set the new equation preferences. See Defaults for New Equations(See 11.29).

The following are valid command line options (options can be preceded with either - or /):

-defaults

This will cause MathType to delete all preferences and then terminate immediately. This will have the effect of restoring all of MathType's Factory Settings(See 11.14) . Please use this with caution!

-new

Normally, if you include files to be opened on the command line, MathType will not start with an open, untitled, empty equation window. Use this option to force one to be opened. See the New command on the File menu(See 8.3.1).

-server

This causes MathType to start in server mode. See Server Dialog(See 8.4.26).

-regserver

This causes MathType to re-register itself with OLE(See 11.31) and then terminate immediately. This can be used to clear up some kinds of OLE problems.

-unregserver

This causes MathType to remove its OLE(See 11.31) registration and then terminate immediately.

170 MathType for Windows 8.2 Windows Start Menu

When MathType is installed, a MathType 6 sub-menu is added to the Windows Start menu. It contains the following items:

MathType

Runs the MathType application.

MathType Server

Runs the MathType application in server mode. See Server Dialog(See 8.4.26).

Remove MathType

Removes the MathType application and supporting files from your computer. See Removing MathType(See 4.1.5).

Equation Conversion Manager

Controls the kinds of equations for which MathType will be the designated editor. See Equation Conversion Manager(See 4.1.7).

MathType Help

Opens this help file at its Table of Contents. 8.3 Menus

In This Chapter File menu(See 8.3.1) Edit menu(See 8.3.2) View menu(See 8.3.3) Zoom Sub-menu(See 8.3.4) Format menu(See 8.3.5) Color Sub-menu(See 8.3.6) Matrix Sub-menu(See 8.3.7) Style menu(See 8.3.8) Size menu(See 8.3.9) Preferences Menu(See 8.3.10) Equation Preferences Sub-menu(See 8.3.11) Help menu(See 8.3.12) MathType on the Web sub-menu(See 8.3.13) 8.3.1 File menu

New Ctrl+N

171 MathType for Windows

Opens a new, empty, equation window so that you can work in it. This window will be untitled until you give it a name when you save it as a file using the Save or Save As commands on this menu. You can also use an untitled window as a scratchpad for equations to be added to the toolbar or copied via the clipboard or drag-and-drop into other equation windows or documents.

Open... Ctrl+O

Opens an existing MathType equation file from disk, and displays it in a new window. When you choose the Open command, MathType displays the standard Open dialog box, which lets you change volumes drives and folders directories until you find the file you need, and then open it either by double-clicking or by clicking Open. If you worked on a MathType file recently, you can open it quickly by choosing its name from the bottom of the File menu.

Close Ctrl+F4

Close and return to document

Closes the equation window. If you have made changes to the equation in this window, a dialog box will appear asking you if you want to save these changes. You can also close a window by clicking the Close Box in the upper-right corner of the window.

If the current MathType window contains an equation that is embedded in a document via OLE(See 11.31) , the name of the or document is indicated in the command title. When you choose this command, the contents of the current window are inserted into your document, replacing any previous version of the equation. The 'Save Changes' dialog box will appear unless the "Don't show Save Changes dialog" option has been turned on in the Object Editing Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.20).

Save Ctrl+S

Saves the current version of the equation that you're working on. If your equation is untitled, a Save As Dialog(See 8.4.24) will appear so that you can choose a name for it. Once an equation has been named and saved on disk, using the Save command again will replace the previous version with the new one. If you want to keep the previous version in addition to the new one, use the Save As command described below.

Update document Ctrl+S

This command is displayed in place of the Save command when the MathType window in which you're working contains an equation that's embedded in a document via OLE(See 11.31) . When you choose the Update command, the contents of the MathType window are inserted into your document, replacing any previous version of the equation. It is usually not necessary to choose the Update command to save your equation, because you will be asked if you want to save the equation when you close the window.

Save As...

Preserves the current version of the equation that you're working on by saving it on disk. Use the Save As command, rather than the Save command, when you want to save an untitled equation, or when you want to save an equation under a new name, in a different folder directory , or in a different file format. If you choose the Save As command from a window

172 MathType for Windows containing an equation that's embedded in a document via OLE(See 11.31) , a copy of the embedded equation will be saved in a file separate from the document, ending the OLE session and leaving the document unchanged.

Print Ctrl+P

Prints the equations contained in the currently active MathType window.

Exit Alt+F4

Terminates the MathType (or MathType Server) application. If you have made changes to equations in any open MathType windows, you will be asked if you want to save those changes for each window that has been modified.

Most-recently-used files

Up to four MathType equation files that you recently worked on are listed at the bottom of the File menu. You can re-open any of these files just by choosing its name from this menu. This is simply a convenient way to open a file, saving you the step of locating the file on disk. You can explicitly remove a file name from the menu by holding down the Alt key as you choose the file name from the menu. Removing a file name will not have any effect on the file itself. 8.3.2 Edit menu

Undo command Ctrl+Z

Reverses the changes from the last command as shown in the text of the menu item. Every command can be undone, back to the point at which the window was opened. This item will be grayed out and will display Can't Undo when there are no more commands to be undone.

Redo command Ctrl+Y

Re-applies the most recent undo command. Every Undone command can be redone. If there are no commands to be redone, this will display as Can't Redo.

Cut Ctrl+X

Copies the current selection to the clipboard(See 11.6) , and deletes it from the equation. The type of data placed on the clipboard is determined by the Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2).

Copy Ctrl+C

Copies whatever is currently selected to the clipboard(See 11.6) . The type of data placed on the clipboard is determined by the Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2).

Paste Ctrl+V

Inserts the contents of the clipboard(See 11.6) into the equation at the insertion point, or replaces whatever is selected with the contents of the clipboard. For this command to be successful, the clipboard must contain a MathType equation, a Microsoft Equation Editor equation, a Microsoft Word "formula field" equation (created using Word's formula typesetting

173 MathType for Windows commands), or the translated text generated by one of MathType's translators, with MathType equation data included.

Clear

Removes whatever is currently selected from the equation. The items removed are not transferred to the clipboard(See 11.6) , so this command does not affect the contents of the Clipboard. The effect is the same as if you had pressed the Backspace or Delete key.

Insert Symbol…

Brings up the Insert Symbol dialog(See 8.4.13), allowing you to insert symbols from any font on your computer, add symbols to the toolbar, or assign keyboard shortcuts to symbols.

Open Math Input Panel... Ctrl+Shift+M

Brings up the Math Input Panel (MIP). Write the equation in the MIP, and when you're finished, click the Insert button. The equation appears in the MathType editing window at the location of the insertion point. Functions in your list of Functions Recognized are also recognized in the MIP. This command is only available on computers running Windows 7.

Custom Speech Text...

When there is a selection in the MathType editing area, this command brings up the Custom Speech Text dialog(See 8.4.1). Allows you to specify exact speech text for MathPlayer to read aloud after publishing a Word document as a MathPage. See dialog description.

Remove Speech Text...

When there is a selection in the MathType editing area, this command brings up the Custom Speech Text dialog(See 8.4.1). Allows you to remove custom speech text that had been previously applied with the Custom Speech Text dialog. See dialog description.

Select All Ctrl+A

Selects the entire equation, even if the equation is too large to fit into the window. This command is useful for subsequently copying the equation to the clipboard(See 11.6) for transfer to a word processing document, or before using the Backspace or Delete keys to delete the entire contents of the equation window. 8.3.3 View menu

Zoom

This item displays the Zoom Sub-menu(See 8.3.4) which allows you to change the viewing scale.

Show All Ctrl+Shift+Y

This command toggles the display of certain special symbols in MathType equations. These symbols include tab characters, explicitly entered spaces, and alignment marks. A checkmark next to this menu item indicates that these special symbols are currently displayed. The special symbols will not be printed or appear in equations that you have inserted into documents.

174 MathType for Windows

Show Nesting Ctrl+Shift+N

This command toggles the equation display between normal viewing mode and nesting mode, where the background of each equation slot(See 11.37) is displayed in gray and has a recessed "3-D" look. This mode is useful in that it allows you to more easily see the hierarchical structure of your equations. The gray slot backgrounds will not be printed or appear in equations that you have inserted into documents.

Symbol Palettes Ctrl+Alt+K

This command toggles the display of the Symbol Palettes row of the toolbar. A checkmark next to this menu item indicates that the Symbol Palettes are currently displayed. See Toolbars(See 8.6.1) for information on using the Symbol Palettes.

Template Palettes Ctrl+Alt+T

This command toggles the display of the Template Palettes row of the toolbar. A checkmark next to this menu item indicates that the Template Palettes are currently displayed. See Toolbars(See 8.6.1) for information on using the Template Palettes.

Small Bar Ctrl+Alt+F

This command toggles the display of the Small Bar row of the toolbar. A checkmark next to this menu item indicates that the Small Bar is currently displayed. See Toolbars(See 8.6.1) for information on using the Small Bar.

Large Tabbed Bar Ctrl+Alt+L

This command toggles the display of the Large Tabbed Bar row of the toolbar. A checkmark next to this menu item indicates that the Large Tabbed Bar is currently displayed. See Toolbars(See 8.6.1) for information on using the Large Tabbed Bar.

Small Tabbed Bar Ctrl+Alt+S

This command toggles the display of the Small Tabbed Bar tow of the toolbar. A checkmark next to this menu item indicates that the Small Tabbed Bar is currently displayed. See Toolbars(See 8.6.1) for information on using the Small Tabbed Bar.

Toolbar Ctrl+Alt+B

This command toggles the display of the entire toolbar. A checkmark next to this menu item indicates that toolbar is currently displayed. See Toolbars(See 8.6.1) for more information.

Ruler Ctrl+Alt+R

This command toggles the display of the ruler. A checkmark next to this menu item indicates that the ruler is currently displayed.

(Open Windows)

The titles of all open equation windows are listed at the bottom of the View menu. You can bring any of these windows to the front just by choosing its name from this menu or clicking on its name in the Windows Task Bar.

175 MathType for Windows

8.3.4 Zoom Sub-menu

100% Ctrl+1 200% Ctrl+2 400% Ctrl+4 800% Ctrl+8 Other…

These commands change the scale at which you are viewing the equation. The percentages are relative to the size of the equation when inserted into a document or printed. Working at 400% or 800% is handy for making fine adjustments using Nudging(See 11.30).

Use the Other… command to bring up the Zoom Dialog(See 8.4.31) to select a viewing scale other than 100, 200, 400, or 800%. 8.3.5 Format menu

Align Left Ctrl+Shift+L Align Center Ctrl+Shift+J Align Right Ctrl+Shift+R Align at = Align at .

Moves lines in a pile(See 11.33) horizontally so that the desired alignment is achieved. Align at = actually will align at any relational operator(See 11.35).

Align at Top

Positions the pile(See 11.33) or matrix containing the insertion point so that its top line aligns with the line containing it.

Example:

Align at Center

Positions the pile(See 11.33) or matrix containing the insertion point or selected so that its middle line (or its vertical center if it contains an even number of lines) aligns with the line containing it.

Examples:

176 MathType for Windows

Align at Bottom

Positions the pile(See 11.33) or matrix containing the insertion point or selected so that its bottom line aligns with the line containing it.

Example:

Color

Displays the Color Sub-menu(See 8.3.6), which allows you to change the current color or to define new colors.

Line Spacing…

Displays the Line Spacing Dialog(See 8.4.15) allowing you to specify the distance between lines in a pile(See 11.33).

Matrix

Displays the Matrix Sub-menu(See 8.3.7) allowing you to modify a matrix. To make this command available, either select a matrix or place the insertion point in one of its elements.

Fence Alignment…

Brings up the Fence Alignment Dialog(See 8.4.11), allowing you to modify how a fence(See 11.15) template aligns vertically with the line that contains it. To affect a specific fence template, either select a fence template or place the insertion point inside of a fence template.

Inline Equation

This command toggles the "inline" property of the equation. When this item is checked, it means the equation is to be placed in a line of text. If it is not checked, the equation is to have its own paragraph in the document (called a "display" equation). Currently, this has no affect on an equation placed in a document as an OLE(See 11.31) graphic object, but may affect how the equation is translated (e.g. to TeX(See 11.41)), depending on the particular translator used.

Reset Nudge

This command removes any nudging(See 11.30) that may have been applied to the current selection.

Define Spacing…

Brings up the Define Spacing dialog(See 8.4.5), allowing you to set various equation dimensions (e.g. fraction bar thickness) for the entire equation or for new equations.

177 MathType for Windows

8.3.6 Color Sub-menu

The commands on this sub-menu of the Format menu allow you to color all or part of your equation. Right after installing MathType, this menu will contain the basic colors of Black, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow. You can add your own colors to this menu using the Edit Color Menu Dialog(See 8.4.8). MathType will also add any colors that are being used in the currently open equation window. Use the Other Color Dialog to use a new color without adding it permanently to the menu.

(Color items)

The colors shown here consist of:

 Basic colors (e.g., Black, Red, etc.)  Colors you have added to the menu using the Edit Color Menu Dialog(See 8.4.8)  Additional colors used in open equation windows  The default equation color, if it is not one of the above

A bullet next to the color indicates the current color (used for characters you are about to enter) or the color of the current selection (if it is all one color). This color is also shown in the Color area of the Status Bar(See 5.7.4).

Choosing a color from the menu sets the color of the current selection and for subsequently entered items.

Other…

This command displays the Other Color Dialog allowing you to choose a color without adding it permanently to the menu. You can also invoke this command by double-clicking the Color area of the Status Bar(See 5.7.4).

Edit Color Menu…

This command displays the Edit Color Menu Dialog(See 8.4.8) allowing you to add or remove menu colors, name colors, and define advanced color properties for use with professional publishing applications like Quark XPress and Adobe PageMaker or InDesign. 8.3.7 Matrix Sub-menu

The commands on this sub-menu of the Format menu allow you to modify an existing matrix.

Add Row Above Ctrl+M,A

Inserts a row above the row containing the insertion point or selection.

Add Row Below Ctrl+M,B

Inserts a row below the row containing the insertion point or selection.

Add Column to Left Ctrl+M,L

Inserts a column to the left of the column containing the insertion point or selection.

178 MathType for Windows

Add Column to Right Ctrl+M,R

Inserts a column to the right of the column containing the insertion point or selection.

Delete Row Ctrl+M,D

Deletes the row containing the insertion point or selection.

Delete Column Ctrl+M,Shift+D

Deletes the column containing the insertion point or selection.

Change Matrix…

Brings up the Matrix Dialog(See 8.4.19) allowing you to modify the matrix. 8.3.8 Style menu

The commands on this menu assign a style(See 5.6.1) to the selected part of the equation or subsequently typed characters. The current style or the style of the selection (if it is all of one style) is shown in the status bar.

Math Ctrl+Plus

The Math style is the default style for typing mathematics. When the current style is Math, MathType assigns the Variable, Function, Number, or Symbol style automatically based on what you type. IfMathType recognizes a sequence of alphabetic characters as a standard abbreviation for a mathematical function(See 11.20) (e.g. sin for the sine trigonometric function), it will use the Function style. All other alphabetic characters are assigned the Variable style.

Text Ctrl+Shift+E

Use the Text style when you want to type a sentence or phrase in English (or other natural language) instead of in math. When in Text style, the spacebar will be enabled to allow you to enter spaces between words.

Function Ctrl+Shift+F

Use this command to create a function(See 11.20) that was not automatically given the Function style. (See also the Functions Recognized Dialog(See 8.4.12).)

Variable Ctrl+Shift+V

Use this command to assign the Variable style to characters that would otherwise be given a different style. For example, sin is a function name that MathType will automatically assign the Function style. You would use this command if you actually wanted to enter three adjacent variables, "s", "i", and "n".

Greek- Symbol Ctrl+Shift+G

This command allows you to use the keyboard to type Greek letters. Once this style is active, the letters you type will be given either the L.C. Greek or U.C. Greek style, depending on whether you type a lower-case (small) or upper-case (capital) letter.

179 MathType for Windows

Often it is easier to enter a single Greek letter by using the Ctrl+G One-shot Keyboard Shortcut(See 5.2.3) or by using the Greek symbol palette. This avoids having to switch into Greek style and back again, because the one-shot only affects the very next keystroke.

Vector- Matrix Ctrl+Shift+B

Mathematical vectors and matrices are sometimes given a bold character style. Use this command to assign the Vector- Matrix style to selected text or subsequently typed characters.

Often it is easier to enter a matrix or vector by using the Ctrl+B One-shot Keyboard Shortcut(See 5.2.3) . This avoids having to switch into Vector-Matrix style and back again.

User 1 Ctrl+Shift+U User 2 Ctrl+Alt+Shift+U

The User 1 and User 2 styles may be used any way you like. Use the Define Styles Dialog(See 8.4.6) to assign a font(See 11.17) and character style(See 11.5) to each. These styles are used most often to enter characters from alternate alphabets, such as Blackboard Bold (double- stroked)(See 5.6.2) or Fraktur (Old German)(See 5.6.3) .

Other…

This command brings up the Other Style dialog(See 8.4.22), allowing you to assign a specific font and character style to selected text or subsequently typed characters.

Define…

This command brings up the Define Styles dialog(See 8.4.6), allowing you to change the font and character style(See 11.5) assigned to each style(See 5.6.1) for the entire equation or for new equations. You can also invoke this command by double-clicking on the Style area of the status bar(See 5.7.4). 8.3.9 Size menu

The commands on this menu assign a typesize(See 11.45) or an explicit point(See 11.34) size to the current selection or subsequently typed characters. The current size or the size of the selection (if it is all of one size) is shown in the Status Bar(See 5.7.4).

Full

Assigns the Full typesize(See 11.45) either to selected characters or to characters that you type subsequently.

Subscript

Assigns the Subscript typesize(See 11.45) either to selected characters or to characters that you type subsequently.

Sub-subscript

Assigns the Sub-subscript typesize(See 11.45) either to selected characters or to characters that you type subsequently.

Symbol

180 MathType for Windows

Assigns the Symbol typesize(See 11.45) either to selected characters or to characters that you type subsequently.

Sub-symbol

Assigns the Sub-symbol typesize(See 11.45) either to selected characters or to characters that you type subsequently.

User 1

Assigns the User 1 typesize(See 11.45) either to selected characters or to characters that you type subsequently.

User 2

Assigns the User 2 typesize(See 11.45) either to selected characters or to characters that you type subsequently.

Other…

Brings up the Other Size Dialog(See 8.4.21) in which you can enter a specific font size in points(See 11.34).

Smaller Ctrl+Shift+<

Decreases the size of selected characters by 1 point(See 11.34) (this increment can be changed in the Define Sizes Dialog(See 8.4.4)).

Larger CommandCtrl+Shift+>

Increases the size of selected characters by 1 point(See 11.34) (this increment can be changed in the Define Sizes Dialog(See 8.4.4)).

Reset Smaller/Larger

Resets the size of selected characters to their original size. Undoes the effect of using the Smaller or Larger commands.

Define…

This command brings up the Define Sizes Dialog(See 8.4.4), allowing you to change the specific point(See 11.34) size assigned to each typesize(See 11.45) for the entire equation or for new equations. You can also invoke this command by double-clicking on the Size area of the Status Bar(See 5.7.4). 8.3.10 Preferences Menu

The commands on this menu allow you to change MathType's preferences. These are settings which affect how MathType works for all equations.

Cut and Copy Preferences...

This command displays the Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2), allowing you to translate equations into other mathematical languages.

Web and GIF Preferences…

181 MathType for Windows

This command displays the Web and GIF Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.29), allowing you to change settings that affect GIF(See 5.4.2) equation files you create and to define an HTML text fragment that will be copied to the clipboard every time you save a GIF file.

Functions Recognized…

This command displays the Functions Recognized Dialog(See 8.4.12), allowing you to add or remove functions(See 11.20) (e.g., sin, cos) that MathType automatically recognizes as you type.

Workspace Preferences…

This command displays the Workspace Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.30), allowing you to change settings that affect MathType's working environment.

Customize Keyboard…

This command displays the Customize Keyboard Dialog(See 8.4.2), allowing you to add, modify, and delete your keyboard shortcuts.

Object Editing Preferences…

This command displays the Object Editing Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.20), allowing you to modify settings that control how MathType works with other OLE(See 11.31) -compatible applications (e.g., Microsoft Word and all other word processors).

Equation Preferences

Displays the Equation Preferences Sub-menu(See 8.3.11) to allow you to load and save equation preferences(See 11.12).

(Most-recently-used preference files)

Up to four MathType equation preference files that you recently used are listed at the bottom of the Preferences menu. By choosing its name from the menu, the equation preferences contained in the file will be used both for the current equation(See 11.7) and for new equations. This is simply a convenient way to load equation preferences from a file you saved using the Save Equation Preference Dialog(See 8.4.25), without having to locate the file on disk. See New Equation Preferences(See 11.29).

If you hold down the Shift key while choosing a file, only the current equation's preferences will be affected. The defaults for new equations will not be changed. This is equivalent to unchecking the Use for new equations option in the Load Equation Preferences dialog.

You can explicitly remove a file name from the menu by holding down the Alt key as you choose the file name from the menu. Removing a file name will not have any effect on the file itself. 8.3.11 Equation Preferences Sub-menu

This sub-menu contains commands for saving and loading equation preference files containing size, style, and spacing settings.

182 MathType for Windows

Load from Default Settings…

This command sets the equation preferences(See 11.12) of the current equation to the factory settings(See 11.14) . It does not affect the New Equation Preferences(See 11.29).

Load from Preferences for New Equations

This command sets the equation preferences of the current equation to new equation preferences .

Load from File…

This command displays the Load Equation Preferences Dialog allowing you to load the equation preferences (sizes, styles, and spacing) from a file you saved previously using the Save to File command on this menu.

Save to Preferences for New Equations

This command sets the new equation preferences to the equation preferences of the current equation.

Save to File…

This command displays the Save Equation Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.25) allowing you to save the equation preferences (sizes, styles, and spacing) of the current equation into a file. You can load an equation preferences file later using the Load from File command on this menu. 8.3.12 Help menu

This menu contains commands that include bringing up MathType's online help, sending your Web browser directly to the MathType web site, and unlocking and registering MathType.

Table of Contents F1

Opens MathType's online help.

Tutorials

Opens the Tutorials(See 4.2) chapter in MathType's help.

MathType on the Web

The MathType on the Web Sub-menu(See 8.3.13) contains commands for sending your Web browser directly to the MathType Web site.

Unlock/Register MathType…

This command opens a dialog that allows you to enter your product key to unlock MathType as well as register your product so you can receive free technical support, upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing.

About MathType…

This command displays MathType's About box showing you:

 The version of the MathType application you are currently using;

183 MathType for Windows

 Your product registration info, including your partial product key if you have unlocked MathType. 8.3.13 MathType on the Web sub-menu

MathType Home Page…

Opens the MathType home page (e.g. http://www.dessci.com/en for English).

Online Support…

Send Feedback…

Opens your default email program so that you can send feedback to Design Science regarding your experiences with MathType or to request future enhancements. If you have a problem using MathType or a bug to report, please visit our online tech support area first.

Order MathType…

Opens the e-commerce area of the Design Science Web site where you can purchase MathType (or any of our other products).

Check for Latest Version Now…

Access MathType version information via the Internet. See Checking For the Latest Version(See 4.1.8).

Automatic Version Checking

Leave this checked if you want MathType to automatically check for newer versions via the Internet about once a month. For more details see Checking For the Latest Version(See 4.1.8).

Show Tips

Leave this checked if you'd like, during version checks, to occasionally be informed about other Design Science product releases or product tips.

Future MathType

Opens a page on our website that will allow you to give us your ideas for future enhancements of MathType. 8.4 Dialogs

In This Chapter Custom Speech Text Dialog(See 8.4.1) Customize Keyboard Dialog(See 8.4.2) Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.3)

184 MathType for Windows

Define Sizes Dialog(See 8.4.4) Define Spacing Dialog(See 8.4.5) Define Styles Dialog(See 8.4.6) Edit / New Color Dialog(See 8.4.7) Edit Color Menu Dialog(See 8.4.8) Using Equation Conversion Manager(See 8.4.9) Expression Properties Dialog(See 8.4.10) Fence Alignment Dialog(See 8.4.11) Functions Recognized Dialog(See 8.4.12) Insert Symbol Dialog(See 8.4.13) Insert Symbol Search Dialog(See 8.4.14) Line Spacing Dialog(See 8.4.15) Load Equation Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.16) Load Equation Preferences from Factory Settings Dialog(See 8.4.17) Load Equation Preferences from File Dialog(See 8.4.18) Matrix Dialog(See 8.4.19) Object Editing Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.20) Other Size Dialog(See 8.4.21) Other Style Dialog(See 8.4.22) Ruler Units Dialog(See 8.4.23) Save As Dialog(See 8.4.24) Save Equation Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.25) Server Dialog(See 8.4.26) Tab Properties Dialog(See 8.4.27) Unlock/Register MathType Dialog(See 8.4.28) Web and GIF Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.29) Workspace Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.30) Zoom Dialog(See 8.4.31) 8.4.1 Custom Speech Text Dialog

One method of preparing documents that can be read aloud with assistive technology (AT) is with the Publish to MathPage(See 6.1.2.16) command in Word, and using MathML for the equations. Generally the default speech spoken by MathPlayer is appropriate, but there may be situations where you need it to speak text that's slightly different from the default. MathType 6.9 provides a means for you to specify the text to speak.

Note: MathType's "custom speech text" feature requires MathPlayer 3.0 or later for the document to be read properly. MathPlayer is a free download from the Design Science website.

185 MathType for Windows

 To specify custom text, select the equation or equation fragment in MathType. In the Edit menu, choose the Custom Speech Text command to launch the Custom Speech Text dialog.  In the Custom speech text window, type the text you'd like MathPlayer to speak, using only alphanumeric characters, periods, and commas.  To edit custom speech text that had been previously applied to an expression, follow the same procedure as above, replacing the old text with new.  To remove custom speech text, select the section of the equation to which custom speech text is applied, and choose the Remove Speech Text command from the Edit menu. If you no longer want custom speech text for any part c the equation, you may select the entire equation and apply the command.

Note: The Custom Speech Text and Remove Speech Text commands are also on the contextual (right-click) menu. They perform the same function as the commands on the Edit menu, so use whichever set of commands is more convenient for you.

 Example:

MathPlayer 3.0's standard text for the first fraction will be fraction 60 miles over hour end fraction. You'd like for MathPlayer to speak this text: 60 miles per hour. Simply select the first fraction in your equation, open the Custom Speech Text dialog, and type that text into the dialog. Click OK. In fact, you might want to also configure the dot to be spoken as "times" instead of "dot", and the other fractions to be spoken similarly to the first one. 8.4.2 Customize Keyboard Dialog

This dialog allows you to review, assign, and remove keyboard shortcuts(See 11.24) for all MathType commands, symbols, and templates. Characters that were recently inserted using

186 MathType for Windows the Insert Symbol Dialog(See 8.4.13) and characters that currently have shortcuts assigned to them are also shown here. Use the Insert Symbol dialog to assign keyboard shortcuts to other characters.

Command

This pane shows all of MathType's commands, symbols, and templates organized in a tree hierarchy. Click on each item in the tree to see the item's description shown in the Description box. Items with an icon to the left are categories of commands. Click on the icon to expand and collapse the tree to hide and show the sub-menus. All non-category items represent commands, symbols, and templates to which you can assign keyboard shortcuts.

Description

This area displays a description of the item currently selected in the Command pane.

Clicking this button closes the dialog. There is no Cancel button. Use the Reset all button to restore all shortcuts to their factory settings(See 11.14) or the Reset selection button to restore an individual item.

Reset all

Click this button to restore all shortcuts to their factory settings(See 11.14) .

Reset selection

Click this button to restore the keyboard shortcuts for the currently selected command, symbol, or template to its factory settings(See 11.14) .

Enter new shortcut key(s)

Current keys

Assign

Remove

These dialog items are described in Assigning and removing keyboard shortcuts(See 5.2.1). 8.4.3 Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog

187 MathType for Windows

Include translator name in translation

Include MathType data in translation

188 MathType for Windows

See Also

Working With MathML(See 7.2.3) Working With TeX(See 7.2.4) 8.4.4 Define Sizes Dialog

This dialog is used to view and/or modify the point(See 11.34) sizes assigned to typesizes(See 11.45) for the entire equation or for new equations. Click in one of the typesize values to view a descriptive picture to the right that gives you an idea of where the particular size will be used in your equations.

Changing the main font size of equations

The main font size of an equation is the point size used for most of the equation, as opposed to the size used for subscripts and large symbols, like summation signs and integrals. In MathType's system of typesizes, the main font size is called Full size. To make it easy to change the font size of equations as a whole without changing the proportions between the various sizes, MathType allows you to define all of the other typesizes as percentages of the Full size. So, to change the size of the equation as a whole, you can just enter a new point size for Full size, and all of the other typesizes will be changed relative to it. If you wish to assign sizes that are not relative to Full size, you can assign absolute sizes to any or all of the typesizes in units of inches, centimeters, points, or picas.

Use for new equations

If this option is checked, the sizes will be changed both for the current equation(See 11.7) and for new equations you create from that point on (see New Equation Preferences(See 11.29) ). If you uncheck this option, the size settings will affect only the current equation.

Factory Settings

Click this button to restore the sizes in this dialog to the factory settings(See 11.14) . 8.4.5 Define Spacing Dialog

This dialog is used to view and/or modify the spacing dimensions for the entire equation or for new equations. Click in one of the spacing values to view a descriptive picture to the right that gives you an idea of where the particular dimension will be used in your equations.

Most spacing dimensions are distances. These distances can be entered in specific distance units(See 11.47) or as a percentage of the Full typesize(See 11.45). The latter allows the spacing to change in proportion to the size you assign to Full in the Define Sizes Dialog(See 8.4.4).

A few spacing values are percentages of some normal value, rather than distances. These are indicated in the spacing value description as (% of normal) and can only be entered as percentages. For example, the operator spacing factor is such a value. MathType determines

189 MathType for Windows the spacing between operators and the variables to which they are applied according to the rules of mathematical typesetting but, if you desire, you can reduce this spacing by entering a percentage of less than 100%. Similarly, you can add more spacing by entering a percentage of greater than 100%.

Use for new equations

If this option is checked, the spacing dimensions will be changed both for the current equation(See 11.7) and for new equations you create from that point on (see New Equation Preferences(See 11.29) ). If you uncheck this option, the spacing dimensions will affect only the current equation.

Factory Settings

Click this button to restore the spacing dimensions in this dialog to the factory settings(See 11.14) . 8.4.6 Define Styles Dialog

This dialog allows you to change the font(See 11.17) and character style(See 11.5) assigned to each style(See 5.6.1) for the entire equation or for new equations.

This dialog has two panes, Simple and Advanced, that let you modify the same settings in two different ways. Simple

The settings on this pane allow you to quickly change the most common options. Choosing a Primary font assigns this font to the Text, Function, Variable, Vector-Matrix and Number styles. The Vector-Matrix style is set to bold and non-italic, while the other styles are all set to non-bold and non-italic, except for Italic variables which is controlled by its own checkbox. Choosing a Greek and math fonts option sets the L.C. Greek, U.C. Greek, Symbol and Extra Math styles to the given font set. The first font is assigned to L.C. Greek, U.C. Greek, and Symbol, and the second font is assigned to Extra Math. The bold and italic character styles are also turned off for these styles, except for Italic lower-case Greek which is controlled by its own checkbox.

The above rules for Simple mode are outlined in the table below:

Simple mode Styles affected Bold set to Italic set to setting

Primary font Text Off Off Function Off Off Variable Off ** Vector- Matrix On Off Number Off Off

190 MathType for Windows

Greek and math L.C. Greek Off ** fonts U.C. Greek Off Off Symbol Off Off Extra Math Off Off

** controlled by checkbox.

If you make changes in the Advanced pane such that the above patterns of font and character style no longer apply, when you switch to the Simple pane the settings for Primary font and/or Greek and math fonts will be blank. Either choose new options, which will reset the bold and italic character styles to the default settings, or return to the Advanced pane to make minor changes. Advanced

Use this mode to get finer control over your style assignments. You can assign a different font and character style to each of the 11 styles.

Use for new equations

If this option is checked, the style settings will be changed both for the current equation(See 11.7) and for new equations you create from that point on (see new equation preferences(See 11.29) ). If you uncheck this option, the style settings will affect only the current equation(See 11.7) .

Factory Settings

Click this button to restore the style settings in this dialog to the factory settings(See 11.14).

Support for international keyboards

If your primary written language uses a non-Roman character set (e.g. Greek, Cyrillic), you probably have more than one logical keyboard installed on your computer (Input Locales in the Keyboard section of the Windows Control Panel) that you can switch between using either a keyboard shortcut or the keyboard menu in the System Tray, next to the clock in the Windows Task Bar. If you don't have one now, you may want to add one to make it easier to type Roman alphabet characters for math. Most mathematics in the world uses the Roman alphabet, and since many non-English keyboard layouts have replaced some of the useful math keys (e.g. +, <, >) by alternate characters, it is often more convenient to have both an English keyboard and a non-English keyboard installed.

MathType has a special feature for users that have multiple logical keyboards. You can cause the current style to switch to Text whenever you switch to the keyboard for your native language and switch back to math when you switch to the English keyboard. Similarly, you can make the keyboard switch whenever you change style to Text and switch back when you choose a different style, presumably to type more math.

If you have multiple logical keyboards, the Language/Keyboard section will be displayed at the bottom of the Define Styles dialog.

Text style

191 MathType for Windows

This menu allows you to choose the keyboard to associate with the Text style. Whenever you switch to the keyboard chosen here, MathType will switch the current style to Text and vice- versa. To break this association, choose Any.

Other styles

This menu allows you to choose the keyboard to associate with all styles except Text. Whenever you switch to the keyboard chosen here, MathType will switch the current style to Math and vice versa. To break this association, choose Any. 8.4.7 Edit / New Color Dialog

This dialog allows you to change the color attributes of the color selected in the Edit Color Menu Dialog(See 8.4.8), or add a new color. Many of these attributes are only important if you plan to save your equations as EPS(See 5.4.1) files for importing into publishing applications like Quark XPress or Adobe PageMaker or InDesign. We'll refer to such applications here as publishing apps and the documents they create as publishing docs. For more detailed explanations of color printing, please refer to your publishing app's documentation.

Name

The name of a color will be shown in the color menu. It is also important in the creation of color EPS(See 5.4.1) files.

It is important to use the same color names in MathType as you used in your publishing docs. This way, like-named colors will be printed on the same color separation.

Printing separation

The two methods of color printing are Process and Spot:

Process color uses four ink colors: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (also called CMYK). Other colors are printed using small dots of these colors in varying amounts.

Spot color uses ink of the specific color created by mixing inks of other colors.

Model

Colors can be specified using either the RGB model or the CMYK model:

RGB allows you to specify colors in terms of amounts of red, blue, and green. This is what you will normally use if you are coloring equations for use in presentations and simple printing.

CMYK allows you to specify colors in terms of amounts of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. This color model is more appropriate for use in publishing docs, especially when printing using process colors.

Color values

Red Green Blue

Cyan Magenta Yellow Black

192 MathType for Windows

Depending on whether you choose the RGB or CMYK color model, you can specify a color using 3 or 4 values, respectively. Each value is a percentage of the indicated color's intensity with 0% meaning to use none of the color and 100% meaning full intensity. You may enter numbers in 1/10ths of a percent if you wish.

If you are importing equations as EPS(See 5.4.1) files into a publishing app, the color name is more important than the actual color values you use in MathType, since the definition of the like- named color in the publishing doc will take precedence. All you need to do in MathType is choose a color that is visually close to the color used in the publishing doc.

Color picker

Click this button to display the standard Windows Color dialog. See the Other Color Dialog for details. 8.4.8 Edit Color Menu Dialog

This dialog allows you to: o Add or remove colors from the Color Menu(See 8.3.6) o Name colors o Define the default equation color that will be used for new equations o Define advanced color properties for compatibility with publishing applications like Quark XPress and Adobe PageMaker or InDesign

Always on menu

This list of colors consists of those colors that are always displayed in the color menu. The checked color is the current default equation color.

Other colors

This list of colors consists of any other colors used in the equation in windows you currently have open.

Move Up Move Down

Click these buttons to move the currently selected menu color up or down in the list, allowing you to put more frequently used colors near the top of the menu for easier access.

Set as default...

Click this button to choose the selected color as the default for new equations. Whenever you create a new equation, any characters you type will be given this color until you change the current color.

New…

Click this button to add a new color to the menu. The Edit/New Color Dialog(See 8.4.7) will be displayed to allow you to define the new color. The new color will initially be a copy of the selected color.

193 MathType for Windows

Edit…

Click this button to display the Edit Color Dialog(See 8.4.7), allowing you to edit the selected color.

Factory Settings

Click this button to set the Color menu back to contain the basic colors it had when you first installed MathType. 8.4.9 Using Equation Conversion Manager

Running the Equation Conversion Manager

Use the two Move buttons in between the lists to move selected equation types from one list to the other.

Show equation types for

Details

Click this button to see details of each equation editor's OLE(See 11.31) registration. This is information that is only useful for troubleshooting OLE problems.

MathType 6 Details

Click this button to see details of MathType's OLE(See 11.31) registration. This is information that is only useful for troubleshooting OLE problems

194 MathType for Windows

8.4.10 Expression Properties Dialog

This dialog allows you to: o Enter or edit the status bar description associated with a toolbar expression; o Edit the expression itself; o Add or remove the keyboard shortcut that may be used to insert the expression into an equation.

Description for expression

This item defines the text that will be displayed in the status bar when the mouse pointer is over the toolbar cell. If you have defined a keyboard shortcut for the expression, it will be displayed as well.

Edit expression…

Click this button to open a new equation window containing the expression. Once you have made changes, just close the window and save the expression.

See Also

Toolbars(See 8.6.1) Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1) Status Bar(See 5.7.4) Drag-and-Drop(See 5.7.1) 8.4.11 Fence Alignment Dialog

Use this dialog to control the vertical alignment of a Fence Template(See 8.5.8.2) (brackets, braces, parentheses, etc.) with the rest of the line in which it resides. This dialog also allows you to set the default alignment for new fence templates. The template affected is the currently selected fence template or the one containing the insertion point.

Alignment options

Although the pictures above the three choices are intended to show how each affects alignment, the easiest way to see the effect of this control is to try it.

Here is a more technical description of the 3 choices:

The math axis(See The math axis(See The fence characters 11.27) of the contents 11.27) of the are sized to cover the

195 MathType for Windows

is aligned with the math contents is aligned contents, then the axis of the rest of the with the math axis of template is vertically line, the fence the rest of the line, centered with respect characters are vertically the fence characters to the math axis(See centered with respect are sized to cover the 11.27) of the rest of to the math axis and contents. the line. are sized to cover the contents.

Default for new templates

These buttons allow you to select the default alignment for new fence templates you insert in your equation from now on. You can have a different default for the group of fence templates that have "pointy" characters from those that do not. This is because pointy fences need to be aligned with the math axis to look good but this is not as important for the others. 8.4.12 Functions Recognized Dialog

MathType automatically recognizes standard mathematical function(See 11.20) names like "sin", "cos" and applies the Function style(See 5.6.1) to them. You can use this dialog to customize the set of functions MathType will automatically recognize.

Removing a function

To remove a function from automatic recognition, select its name in the list box and then click Remove. If you feel you have removed a function by mistake, you can click Cancel to discard your changes or Reset to restore the list of functions to MathType's factory settings(See 11.14) .

Although you might have removed a function from automatic recognition, you still can give a specific function name the proper style using commands on the Style menu.

Adding a function

To add a function to the list, type its name in the New function box, then click Add.

Limitations on new functions

Functions can consist of up to 15 characters, each of which must be a character that MathType would normally place in the variable style, which means accented and un-accented alphabetic characters only. Punctuation, numerals, and operators are not allowed. 8.4.13 Insert Symbol Dialog

This is one of MathType's most powerful dialogs. Some of the tasks you can perform are: o Insert a specific character or mathematical symbol into your equation o Add a frequently used symbol to the toolbar

196 MathType for Windows o Add a keyboard shortcut for a frequently used symbol o Find a symbol by matching words in its description

Dialog Overview

The Insert Symbol dialog is divided into 3 vertical sections by 2 horizontal dividing lines:

o Top: the View by part is used to define what is displayed in the symbol grid o Middle: the Symbol grid shows 128 characters at a time o Bottom: the Shortcut section allows you to add or review keyboard shortcuts associated with symbols

View by

This section consists of the View by menu and the items to the right of it (those above the line running under the menu). The items in this section control which characters are displayed in the Symbol grid. Here are the View by choices and how they work:

Font

Choose this option if you want to insert characters from a font(See 11.17) whose name you already know, or if you want to browse through the available fonts. Once you have chosen this option, the font menu and Bold and Italic checkboxes will be available to let you choose the font and character style(See 11.5) to view and insert.

Style

Choose this option to view the characters of the font currently assigned to a particular style(See 5.6.1).

Description

Choose this option to view characters from all fonts that have a certain word or phrase in their description. Once you have chosen this option, the New search button will be available to let you enter new description-matching criteria (see the Insert Symbol Search Dialog(See 8.4.14)). The Bold and Italic checkboxes will also be available to let you choose the character style(See 11.5) to view and insert.

The current description-matching criteria will be displayed in the Description contains item.

Symbol grid

This section consists of 128 character cells that show the characters selected using the View by options. If Font or Style was chosen in the View by menu, the Range listbox and the Show all ranges checkbox will be visible. If Description was chosen in the View by menu, the Description contains text item and the Show one of each checkbox will be visible instead.

Range

This menu allows you to select which character range you want to see displayed in the grid:

All known characters: Shows all of the characters that MathType believes are in the selected font (this is limited to MathType's knowledge of fonts and will not be available if it has no knowledge of the current font).

197 MathType for Windows

Entire font: Shows every character position in the font (will not be available for fonts with large numbers of characters).

Other ranges: Shows the characters in the given Unicode(See 11.46) range.

Show all ranges

Check this box to force the Range listbox to show all Unicode ranges, not just those that contain characters in the current font.

Description contains

This item shows the current description-matching criteria entered in the Insert Symbol Search Dialog(See 8.4.14).

Show one of each

Check this box to limit the symbol grid to show only one character (from the first font that contains it) for each description matched by the search criteria. If this box is not checked, all versions of each character whose description matches the search criteria will be shown. As each character may be present in many fonts, this might cause too many characters to be shown in the grid, making it difficult to find the character you want.

Font

This item shows the font of the currently selected character in the symbol grid.

Description

This item shows the description of the currently selected character in the symbol grid.

Encoding

This item shows the font encoding(See 11.18) of the currently selected character in the symbol grid.

Unicode

This item shows the Unicode(See 11.46) value of the currently selected character in the symbol grid.

Font position

This item shows the index within the font of the currently selected character in the symbol grid.

Keystroke

This item shows the keystroke, if any, that may be used to type the currently selected character in the symbol grid. This keystroke will only be valid (i.e. will insert the character) when the font is the current font (or style, where the font in question is assigned to the style).

Shortcut

This section shows the keyboard shortcut, if any, associated with the currently highlighted character in the symbol grid.

See Also

Adding Symbols from the Insert Symbol Dialog to the Expression Bars(See 5.1.6)

198 MathType for Windows

Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1) Finding a Symbol by Matching Words in its Description(See 5.5.2) 8.4.14 Insert Symbol Search Dialog

This dialog is used to set the character description(See 11.4) search criteria for the Insert Symbol Dialog(See 8.4.13). You can enter a text string that must match a character's description in order to appear in the symbol grid.

The match string

This text string can contain: o A single word that must be present in the description o A phrase that must be present o A combination of words and phrases, separated by spaces, all of which must be present o A word or phrase preceded by a dash (-) to indicate that it must NOT be present in a description for it to be considered a match Examples:

For simplicity, lets assume the character descriptions that we are trying to match are the following (instead of the thousands MathType actually contains):

1. Latin small letter m

2. Latin small letter n

3. Upwards arrow from bar

4. Rightwards arrow from bar

5. Bar operator

6. Black small square

7. Up harpoon (barb right)

8. Latin letter small capital A

If the search text Matches from above list: is:

small 1, 2, 6, 8: they all contain "small"

small letter 1, 2, 8: they all contain "small" and "letter"

199 MathType for Windows

"small letter" 1, 2: doesn't match 8 as the words aren't in order

bar 3, 4, 5, 7: matches 7 because of "bar" in "barb"

right 4, 7: they both contain "right"

right –wards 7: doesn't match 4 because of "wards" in "rightwards"

Notes

o All matching is case-insensitive ("a" matches "a" or "A"); o Matching is not by whole word ("right" matches "right", "bright", and "rightwards"); o All words and phrases (unless preceded by '-') in the search text must be present for a description to be a match. 8.4.15 Line Spacing Dialog

This dialog is used to change the line spacing of the line or lines in the current selection, or the line containing the insertion point. Line spacing is measured from the baseline of the line whose spacing is being changed to the baseline of the line below it.

Please note that changing line spacing in this dialog does not affect the line spacing used throughout the equation or for new equations. This can be changed in the Define Spacing Dialog(See 8.4.5).

Factory Settings

Click this button to restore the line spacing to the factory settings(See 11.14).

See Also

Units(See 11.47) 8.4.16 Load Equation Preferences Dialog

You can use this dialog to load an equation preference(See 11.12) file that was saved earlier using the Save Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.25). If you want to change the equation preferences of several or all equations in a Microsoft Word document, use the format equations command from Word. See Format Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.8). This dialog works like any other File Open dialog, with an additional checkbox item described below.

Use for new equations

200 MathType for Windows

If this option is checked, the equation preferences will be used both for the current equation(See 11.7) and for new equations you create from that point on (see New Equation Preferences(See 11.29) ). If you uncheck this option, the equation preferences will affect only the current equation. 8.4.17 Load Equation Preferences from Factory Settings Dialog

Use this dialog to control whether you want to reset equation preferences(See 11.12) (sizes, styles, and spacing) to the factory settings(See 11.14) for the current equation and, optionally, for new equations you create from now on. Uncheck Use for new equations if you only want to change the preferences for the current equation. 8.4.18 Load Equation Preferences from File Dialog

This dialog appears whenever you open an existing equation preferences file by selecting it from the Preferences menu or by dropping it onto MathType. Click OK to set the equation preferences for the current equation(See 11.7) as specified in the file, or Cancel to quit.

Use for new equations

If this option is checked, the equation preferences will be used both for the current equation and for new equations you create from that point on (see New Equation Preferences(See 11.29) ). If you uncheck this option, the equation preferences will affect only the current equation . 8.4.19 Matrix Dialog

This dialog is used to define or modify the attributes of a matrix template. To create a new matrix, use a Matrix Template(See 8.5.8.10). To modify an existing matrix, select it or place the insertion point anywhere in it and choose Matrix from the Format menu.

Column alignment

Choose either Left, Center, Right, At = (relational operator(See 11.35)), or At . (decimal point) to align all the matrix elements in all columns. In the current version of MathType, it is not possible to apply alignment to a single column.

# of Columns

Enter the number of columns desired for the matrix. Note that by reducing the number of columns, the contents of the deleted columns will be lost.

Equal column widths

201 MathType for Windows

Check this option to force all the columns of the matrix to have the same width.

Row alignment

Choose either Top, Baseline, or Bottom to align all the matrix elements in all rows. In the current version of MathType, it is not possible to apply alignment to a single row.

# of Rows

Enter the number of rows desired for the matrix. Note that by reducing the number of rows, the contents of the deleted rows will be lost.

Equal row heights

Check this option to force all the rows of the matrix to have the same height.

Partition lines

The preview image of the matrix allows you to add partition lines between the rows and columns of the matrix, as well as around the edges. Click between the elements to change the style of the line between the elements. Each click selects a different line style, rotating through solid, dashed, dotted, and none (no line at all).

Clear all lines

Click to remove all partition lines. 8.4.20 Object Editing Preferences Dialog

Use this dialog to make choices that affect editing of equations from within your word processor and other OLE(See 11.31)-compatible applications.

Edit in a separate window instead of in-place

Check this option if you prefer editing equations in a separate window from your word- processing document. This can make editing easier by allowing you to work at a different zoom level than in your word processor so you can more easily see small characters, like superscripts, primes, and dots.

Uncheck this option if you prefer editing equations directly in the document. Some applications may not support this feature. In this case, editing will always be in a separate window.

Don't show 'Save Changes' dialog for separate window

Check this option if you want to suppress display of the Save Changes dialog that normally appears when you close the equation window after making changes. Your changes will then be saved into the document automatically.

Startup in server mode

Check this option if you prefer that MathType start in server mode(See 8.4.26) whenever you edit an equation for the first time in an editing session. This makes equation editing more responsive but you must exit the MathType application separately when you are finished working with equations.

202 MathType for Windows

8.4.21 Other Size Dialog

Use this dialog to assign a particular point size to selected characters or subsequently typed characters. You must enter the size in points(See 11.34) (decimal fractions are allowed).

We recommend that you use a system of typesizes(See 11.45) rather than explicit sizes as much as possible, to take advantage of MathType's "intelligent" application of mathematical typesetting rules. 8.4.22 Other Style Dialog

Use this dialog to assign a particular font and character style(See 11.5) to selected characters or subsequently typed characters.

We recommend that you use styles(See 5.6.1) rather than explicit fonts and character styles(See 11.5) as much as possible, to take advantage of MathType's "intelligent" application of mathematical typesetting rules. 8.4.23 Ruler Units Dialog

Default units for ruler graduations are inches. If you prefer to work in centimeters, points, or picas, you can double-click the ruler to bring up the Ruler Units dialog. Make your choice of ruler units and click OK. 8.4.24 Save As Dialog

Use this dialog to save an equation as an individual file. Although you will most likely save equations in word processing documents using OLE(See 11.31) or EGO(See 11.10), saving an equation as a file is useful for exchanging equations with other people, moving equations to other computers, saving as EPS(See 5.4.1) for use in desktop publishing applications, or saving them as GIF(See 5.4.2) for use in Internet publishing.

File Formats

MathType can save equations in several file formats. Use the Save as type pull-down menu to choose a format. No matter which format you choose, you can always open the equation file for later editing or use.

203 MathType for Windows

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)

Encapsulated PostScript/none

Encapsulated PostScript/WMF

Encapsulated PostScript/TIFF

EPS(See 5.4.1) is a file format used for graphics in desktop publishing applications like Adobe PageMaker and Quark XPress. MathType can save equations in several kinds of EPS file, each defined by the type of preview image saved in the file. Within a desktop publishing application, the preview image is used to display the equation on screen, whereas the PostScript code itself is used only when printing. The WMF(See 5.4.3) preview image is a Windows Metafile, a standard graphics format generally used only on computers with Microsoft Windows. The TIFF(See 5.4.4) preview image is a cross-platform bitmap format. Use the none option if no preview image is desired. In this case, the EPS file will be a simple ASCII text file.

Windows Metafile (WMF)

This is the standard graphics file format for the Windows operating system. Although the WMF format can accommodate bitmap images, the metafiles created by MathType are "draw"-style graphics and, therefore, are scalable and will print at full resolution. Use this format to import equations into drawing applications.

Graphics Interchange Format (GIF)

GIF(See 5.4.2) is a graphics file format generally used for line art (as opposed to JPEG which is best for photographs) in Internet publishing applications. It first became popular as the graphics format used in the CompuServe online system. Save equations in this format for the creation of web pages. Use the Web and GIF Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.29) to choose the resolution, transparency, and background color you want your GIF equations to have.

Automatic File Numbering

If you intend to create many equation files for import into another application (e.g. EPS(See 5.4.1) files for import into a desktop publishing document or GIF(See 5.4.2) files for a World Wide Web document), it can be handy to give them numbered file names, like "eqn003.eps". MathType can help you do this by automatically filling in the File name box in the Save As dialog with a name that follows a pattern you supply.

To enable this feature, check the Automatic file numbering option. MathType will then automatically generate a new file name using the pattern in the File name pattern box and the number in the Next number box. For example, if you enter a pattern of "eqn#" and a next number of 8, the next 3 equations you save will have names of "eqn8", "eqn9", and "eqn10".

Use several consecutive #s to indicate make the number part of the name have a particular width. In the above example, if you had entered a pattern of "eqn####", the file names would have been "eqn0008", "eqn0009", and "eqn0010". This will make them sort in a more natural order in sorted lists.

204 MathType for Windows

You may change the File name pattern or the Next number boxes at any time; for example, to indicate that the equations belong to a different chapter of your book, or to start the sequence at a new number. 8.4.25 Save Equation Preferences Dialog

Use this dialog to save a preference file containing the equation preferences(See 11.12) from the current equation(See 11.7) or the New Equation Preferences(See 11.29). Preference files created here may be used in the following situations: o In the Load Equation Preferences Dialog o In the Format Equation Command(See 6.2.2.19.8) in Microsoft Word o In the Set Equation Preferences Command(See 6.2.2.19.1) in Microsoft Word o On the MathType Command Line(See 8.1)

This dialog works like any other File Save dialog. 8.4.26 Server Dialog

This dialog is displayed when the MathType application is started in "server mode". Normally when you edit equations using the Insert Object command, use the Insert Equation toolbar button, or double-click on an equation in your word processor (or other OLE(See 11.31)- compatible application), the MathType application is started and stopped each time you edit a different equation. Server mode avoids the frequent starting and stopping by keeping MathType running during your entire equation editing session.

There are several ways to start MathType in server mode:

 Choose the MathType Server item in the MathType sub-menu in the Windows Start menu  Check the OLE Startup in server mode option using the Object Editing Preferences command on the Preferences Menu(See 8.3.10)  Run MathType with "-server" on the command line.

When MathType is running in server mode, it will stay running until you click Exit in the MathType Server dialog or, optionally, you can use the timeout feature that will automatically terminate MathType after it has been idle for a length of time you specify (see the Delay before exit when no equation windows are open item, described below). See Object Editing Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.20) and MathType's Command Line Options(See 8.1)

New Equation

Click this button to open a new, untitled equation window. This command is the same as the New command on the File Menu(See 8.3.1).

Open Equation...

205 MathType for Windows

Click this button to open an existing equation file. This command is the same as the Open command on the File Menu.

Help

Open MathType Help to this page.

Start MathType in server mode on first use

Check this option if you want MathType to start in server mode whenever you do the first OLE equation editing operation. This option is also available in the Object Editing Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.20).

Delay before exit when no equation windows are open

This menu allows you to choose the length of time before MathType will automatically terminate after it has been idle. Any kind of equation editing operation or just viewing this dialog will reset the timer. If you choose Forever from this menu, MathType will only exit when you click Exit in this dialog or from the File Menu of an equation window.

Exit

Click this button to terminate the MathType application immediately. If there are any equation windows open that contain unsaved changes, you will be asked if you want to save them.

Minimize

Click this button to minimize this dialog. This has the same effect as clicking the minimize button in the top-right corner of the dialog. 8.4.27 Tab Properties Dialog

This dialog allows you to edit the text in the toolbar tabs(See 8.6.7) and also assign a keyboard shortcut that brings the tab to the front. To display this dialog, simply double-click on the tab you want to edit or right-click on it and choose Properties. 8.4.28 Unlock/Register MathType Dialog

This dialog allows you to unlock MathType to enable full functionality.

To unlock MathType you must have a valid product key. You can obtain one by purchasing a copy of MathType, either directly from Design Science or from a dealer. You can purchase MathType online at our website , contact us directly via email at [email protected] , or by phone at (800) 827-0685 (U.S. and Canada) or (562) 432-2920 (rest of the world). o Once you've obtained a product key, enter your information. o In order to receive free technical support, upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing, register your copy of MathType by entering your email and ensuring the check box that allows the installer to send your information to Design Science is selected.

206 MathType for Windows

8.4.29 Web and GIF Preferences Dialog

This dialog allows you to:

 Set the resolution, dots-per-inch (dpi), of the GIF equation files you save;  Set the background color for GIF files;  Adjust GIF options such as transparency and smoothing.  Set HTML/text to be copied to the clipboard when a GIF is saved. Bitmap resolution

Use these items to set the resolution (dpi) of the GIF equation files you save from now on. The preset values are: 72 dpi, 96 dpi, and 120 dpi. Current screen (nnn dpi) shows the resolution that your monitor is currently running at, and Other allows you to enter any other dpi to use when saving GIFs. For example, 300 or 600 dpi is good for print quality GIFs. Bitmap background

Use the Change button to bring up the Color Dialog to set a new background color.

Smooth edges (anti-aliasing)

Check this option to create GIF equation images with smooth edges. This is done by using a technique called anti-aliasing. Pixels on the edges of each character are given colors that are intermediate between the character color and the background color. Smoothing generally works best on characters larger than 12pt, so you may want to experiment.

Transparent

Check this option if you want the background of GIF equation images to be transparent, allowing the background of your web page to show between the characters of the equation.

Using transparency with smoothing

You can use these options together. However, to get the best results you should understand how they interact.

Smoothing will be performed using the background color, as described above, even when the Transparent option is checked. In this case, non-transparent pixels will be generated around the edges of the characters. The colors of these pixels will be just as they would if the Transparent option was not checked. This will only look good if the background color of the web page is close to the background color set in this dialog. The closer they are, the more effective the smoothing will be. If the background is highly patterned, you may find equations look better with the Smooth edges option turned off. Copy HTML/text to clipboard on GIF file save

Check this option if you want MathType to put a fragment of HTML (or any other text) on the clipboard every time you save an equation in GIF format. This is useful when you run MathType at the same time as your favorite web page editor. After you create and save each equation, just switch to your editor and paste the HTML code or other text in.

207 MathType for Windows

Paste variable

This menu can be used to paste a variable into the HTML/text fragment you enter in Text to copy. When you save an equation, the variables in the HTML/text will be replaced by the corresponding value for the generated GIF. Variables are identified by the form $(variable). For example, $(URLFileName) will be replaced by the name of the GIF equation file you just saved, in URL-escaped form. The available variables are shown in the table below. The sample values are based on a GIF saved as C:\Program Files\MathType\File 1.gif with a height=37 pixels, width=80 pixels, and a baseline adjustment of 12 pixels.

Variable Description Sample Values

URLFileVolume URL File Volume C:

URLFileDirectory URL File Directory /Program%20Files/MathType

URLFileName URL File Name File 1.gif

FileVolume File Volume C:

FileDir File Directory \Program Files\MathType

FileName File Name File 1.gif

Height_EM Height in EMs 3.0

Height_PX Height in pixels 37

Height_IN Height in inches .51

Height_MM Height in millimeters 13.0

Height_PT Height in points 37.0

Width_EM Width in EMs 6.6

Width_PX Width in pixels 80

Width_IN Width in inches 1.11

Width_MM Width in millimeters 28.2

Width_PT Width in points 80.0

208 MathType for Windows

Base_EM Baseline in EMs 1.0

Base_PX Baseline in pixels 12

Base_IN Baseline in inches .16

Base_MM Baseline in millimeters 4.2

Base_PT Baseline in points 12.0

Base_% Baseline as % of height 32

8.4.30 Workspace Preferences Dialog

Use this dialog to change settings that affect MathType's working environment.

Toolbar size

You can use this section to make the toolbar larger, in case you find the toolbar icons too small to see easily, or to make it smaller, if it is taking up too much space on the screen. You can also make the toolbar take up less screen space by hiding unused bars (see the View Menu(See 8.3.3)).

Insertion point thickness

You can use this section to choose an insertion point(See 11.23) thickness that suits you.

Empty slot thickness

In normal view (see Show Nesting on the View Menu(See 8.3.3)), empty slots(See 11.37) are displayed as dotted boxes. Use this section to set a thickness that suits you. You can also set the color used for empty slots (see Empty slot color below)

Ruler units

Use this menu to set the spacing units for the graduation marks displayed in the ruler to either inches, centimeters, points, or picas.

Colors o Selection. Default color is aqua. Click the Change button to change the color used for selection. When you select all or part of an equation, either by dragging the mouse pointer across it, by using the Shift key in combination with the arrow keys on the keyboard, or by choosing the Select All command, the selection appears with the background color chosen here. Variables, symbols, and other parts of the equation will remain in whatever color you have chosen in the Color picker (on the Format menu -- default black), so if you choose a dark selection color and a dark equation color, you may have trouble seeing the parts of the equation in the selection.

209 MathType for Windows o Background. Default color is white. Click the Change button to change the color used for the background of the MathType equation editing area in normal view (see Show Nesting on the View Menu(See 8.3.3)). o Spaces. Default color is gray. Click the Change button to change the color used for spaces. This color only applies to the spaces added manually, not to automatic spacing applied by MathType. Spaces are normally invisible, but are displayed if Show All is checked in the View Menu(See 8.3.3). o Alignment markers and tabs. Default color is red. Click the Change button to change the color used for alignment markers and tabs. These normally invisible markers are displayed if Show All is checked in the View Menu(See 8.3.3). o Empty slots. Default color is green. Click the Change button to change the color used to display empty slots in normal view (see Show Nesting on the View Menu(See 8.3.3)). You can also set the thickness of the empty slot box (see Empty slot thickness above). o Custom Speech text. Default color is red. Click the Change button to change the color used to underline the part of an equation for which you've specified Exact Text in the Custom Speech Text Dialog(See 8.4.1). Note that Show All must be selected in the View menu in order for this color to take effect.

Show character and template codes in the status bar

Check this option to show the character and template codes in the Status Bar(See 5.7.4). These will be displayed when the mouse pointer is over a toolbar cell containing a symbol(See 11.39) or template(See 11.40) and in the Insert Symbol dialog(See 8.4.13). These character codes are useful to translator writers, for example.

Allow TeX language entry from the keyboard

Check this option to allow keyboard entry of a subset of TeX that is supported by Wikipedia. See Working With TeX(See 7.2.4) and Using TeX Language Input(See 5.2.4).

Show all instructional messages again

Occasionally, a one-time message will appear explaining different features of MathType. These can be turned off on the message dialog. To have these messages appear again, check this option. 8.4.31 Zoom Dialog

This dialog allows you to change the scale at which you see equations in MathType. Increase the zoom scale to make it easier to see fine details of your equations. Reduce it to see more of your equations on screen. The zoom scale will not affect the size of equations in word processing documents or when they are printed.

Magnification

Select one of the preset magnification levels of 800%, 400%, 200%, or 100%, or select Custom to enter a different zoom level (e.g., 150%).

210 MathType for Windows 8.5 Keyboard shortcuts

In This Chapter Formatting(See 8.5.1) Menu Commands(See 8.5.2) Navigation and Selection(See 8.5.3) Keyboard Modifiers (one-shots)(See 8.5.4) Toolbar Commands(See 8.5.5) Window Control(See 8.5.6) Symbol Palettes(See 8.5.7) Template Palettes(See 8.5.8) 8.5.1 Formatting

Shortcuts for formatting equation elements:

Insert Tab (Ctrl+Tab) New Line (Enter) Nudge Down (Ctrl+Down) Nudge Left (Ctrl+Left) Nudge Right (Ctrl+Right) Nudge Up (Ctrl+Up) Rotate Fence Alignment (Ctrl+Shift+A) 8.5.2 Menu Commands

In This Chapter File Menu(See 8.5.2.1) Edit Menu(See 8.5.2.2) View Menu(See 8.5.2.3) Format Menu(See 8.5.2.4) Style Menu(See 8.5.2.5) Size Menu(See 8.5.2.6) Preferences Menu(See 8.5.2.7) Help Menu(See 8.5.2.8)

8.5.2.1 File Menu

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

211 MathType for Windows

Commands appearing on the File menu:

New (Ctrl+N) Open... (Ctrl+O) Close (Ctrl+F4) Save (Ctrl+S) Save As... Print... (Ctrl+P) Exit (Alt+F4)

8.5.2.2 Edit Menu

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Commands appearing on the Edit menu:

Undo (Ctrl+Z) Redo (Ctrl+Y) Cut (Ctrl+X) Copy (Ctrl+C) Paste (Ctrl+V) Clear Insert Symbol... Open Math Input Panel... Select All (Ctrl+A)

8.5.2.3 View Menu

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Commands for items appearing on the View menu:

Show All (Ctrl+Shift+Y) Show Nesting (Ctrl+Shift+N) Symbol Palettes (Ctrl+Alt+K) Template Palettes (Ctrl+Alt+T) Small Bar (Ctrl+Alt+F) Large Tabbed Bar (Ctrl+Alt+L) Small Tabbed Bar (Ctrl+Alt+S) Toolbar (Ctrl+Alt+B) Ruler (Ctrl+Alt+R) View in Wolfram Alpha

Commands appearing on the Zoom submenu of the View menu:

212 MathType for Windows

100% (Ctrl+1) 200% (Ctrl+2) 400% (Ctrl+4) 800% (Ctrl+8) Other...

8.5.2.4 Format Menu

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Commands appearing on the Format menu:

Align Left (Ctrl+Shift+L) Align Center (Ctrl+Shift+J) Align Right (Ctrl+Shift+R) Align at = Align at . Align at Top Align at Center Align at Bottom Color Line Spacing... Matrix Fence Alignment... Inline Equation Reset Nudge Define Spacing...

Commands appearing on the Color submenu of the Format menu:

Other... Edit Color Menu...

Commands appearing on the Matrix submenu of the Format menu:

Add Row Above (Ctrl+M,A) Add Row Below (Ctrl+M,B) Add Column to Left (Ctrl+M,L) Add Column to Right (Ctrl+M,R) Delete Row (Ctrl+M,D) Delete Column (Ctrl+M,Shift+D) Change Matrix (Ctrl+M,C)

213 MathType for Windows

8.5.2.5 Style Menu

Commands appearing on the Style menu:

Math (Ctrl+Plus) Text (Ctrl+Shift+E) Function (Ctrl+Shift+F) Variable (Ctrl+Shift+V) Greek-Symbol (Ctrl+Shift+G) Vector-Matrix (Ctrl+Shift+B) User 1 (Ctrl+Shift+U) User 2 (Ctrl+Alt+Shift+U) Other... Define...

8.5.2.6 Size Menu

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Commands appearing on the Size menu:

Full Subscript Sub-Subscript Symbol Sub-Symbol User 1 User 2 Other... Smaller (Ctrl+<) Larger (Ctrl+>) Reset Smaller/Larger Define...

8.5.2.7 Preferences Menu

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Commands appearing on the Preferences menu:

Cut and Copy Preferences Web and GIF Preferences... Functions Recognized...

214 MathType for Windows

Workspace Preferences... Customize Keyboard... Object Editing Preferences...

Commands appearing on the Equation Preferences submenu of the Preferences menu:

Load from Default Settings... Load from Preferences for New Equations Load from File... Save to Preferences for New Equations Save to File...

8.5.2.8 Help Menu

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Commands appearing on the Help menu:

Table of Contents (F1) MathType Tutorial MathType on the Web Unlock/Register MathType... About MathType...

Commands appearing on the MathType on the Web submenu of the Help menu:

MathType Home Page... Online Support... Send Feedback by Email... Order MathType Future MathType... Check for Latest Version Now... Show Tips 8.5.3 Navigation and Selection

Commands for moving around and/or selecting items in the current equation:

Beginning of Slot (Home) Delete Left (Backspace) Delete Right (Delete) End of Slot (End) Move Down (Down) Move Down Extend Selection (Shift+Down) Move Left (Left) Move Left Extend Selection (Shift+Left)

215 MathType for Windows

Move Right (Right) Move Right Extend Selection (Shift+Right) Move Up (Up) Move Up Extend Selection (Shift+Up) Next Slot (Tab) Previous Slot (Shift+Tab) Scroll Down (Page Down) Scroll Up (Page Up) Select Slot (Ctrl+Shift+S or double-click) Skip Left (Ctrl+Shift+Left) Skip Right (Ctrl+Shift+Right) 8.5.4 Keyboard Modifiers (one-shots)

Shortcuts for specifying the style of the next character typed into the current equation:

Greek-Symbol One-Shot (Ctrl+G) Vector-Matrix One-Shot (Ctrl+B)

User 1 One-Shot (Ctrl+U) User 2 One-Shot (Ctrl+Alt+U)

Shortcuts for modifying the method used to insert the next template entered with a keyboard shortcut:

Replace Selected Template One-Shot (Ctrl+Q) Use Alternate Template Form One-Shot (Ctrl+Shift+O) 8.5.5 Toolbar Commands

Commands for items appearing on the toolbar:

Dock or Float (Ctrl+Alt+D)

Commands for setting keyboard focus within the toolbar:

Focus to Symbol Palettes(See 8.5.7.1) (F2 or F5) Focus to Template Palettes(See 8.5.8.1) (F6) Focus to Small Bar (F7) Focus to Large Tabbed Bar (F8) Focus to Small Tabbed Bar (F9)

Commands for setting keyboard focus within the Tabbed Bars:

Focus to Tab 1 "Algebra" (CtrlF10,1) Focus to Tab 2 "Derivs" (CtrlF10,2) Focus to Tab 3 "Statistics" (CtrlF10,3) Focus to Tab 4 "Matrices" (CtrlF10,4) Focus to Tab 5 "Sets" (CtrlF10,5)

216 MathType for Windows

Focus to Tab 6 "Trig" (CtrlF10,6) Focus to Tab 7 "Geometry" (CtrlF10,7) Focus to Tab 8 "Tab 8" (CtrlF10,8) Focus to Tab 9 "Tab 9" (CtrlF10,9) 8.5.6 Window Control

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Commands for controlling the application's windows: Minimize Maximize Move Restore Size 8.5.7 Symbol Palettes

In This Chapter Symbol Palettes(See 8.5.7.1) Relational symbols(See 8.5.7.2) Spaces and ellipses(See 8.5.7.3) Embellishments(See 8.5.7.4) Operator symbols(See 8.5.7.5) Arrow symbols(See 8.5.7.6) Logical symbols(See 8.5.7.7) Set theory symbols(See 8.5.7.8) Miscellaneous symbols(See 8.5.7.9) Greek characters (lowercase)(See 8.5.7.10) Greek characters (uppercase)(See 8.5.7.11)

8.5.7.1 Symbol Palettes

Relational symbols(See 8.5.7.2)

Spaces and ellipses(See 8.5.7.3)

Embellishments(See 8.5.7.4)

Operator symbols(See 8.5.7.5)

217 MathType for Windows

Arrow symbols(See 8.5.7.6)

Logical symbols(See 8.5.7.7)

Set theory symbols(See 8.5.7.8)

Miscellaneous symbols(See 8.5.7.9)

Greek characters (lowercase)(See 8.5.7.10)

Greek characters (uppercase)(See 8.5.7.11)

8.5.7.2 Relational symbols

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Less-than or equal to from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,,)

Greater-than or equal to from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,.)

Much less-than from Extra Math style

Much greater-than from Extra Math style

Precedes from Extra Math style

Succeeds from Extra Math style

Normal subgroup of from Extra Math style

Contains as normal subgroup from Extra Math style

Tilde operator from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,Alt+~)

Almost equal to from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,~)

Asymptotically equal to from Extra Math style

Approximately equal to from Symbol style

218 MathType for Windows

Not equal to from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,+)

Identical to from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,=)

Delta equal to from Extra Math style

Estimates from Extra Math style

Approaches the limit from Extra Math style

Proportional to from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,P)

8.5.7.3 Spaces and ellipses

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Alignment mark (Ctrl+;)

Zero-width space (Shift+Space)

1-point space (Ctrl+Alt+Space or Ctrl+K,1)

Thin space (1/6 EM) (Ctrl+Space or Ctrl+K,2)

Thick space (1/3 EM) (Ctrl+Shift+Space or Ctrl+K,3)

EM space (Ctrl+K,4)

Horizontal ellipsis from Extra Math style (Ctrl+.,_)

Math-axis ellipsis from Extra Math style (Ctrl+.,-)

Vertical ellipsis from Extra Math style (Ctrl+.,|)

Up right diagonal ellipsis from Extra Math style (Ctrl+.,/)

Down right diagonal ellipsis from Extra Math style (Ctrl+.,\)

219 MathType for Windows

8.5.7.4 Embellishments

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Remove all embellishments

Prime (Ctrl+Alt+')

Double prime (Ctrl+")

Triple prime (Ctrl+6,Alt+')

Back prime (Ctrl+6,`)

Not (Ctrl+6,N)

Strike-through (Ctrl+6,Alt+-)

Cross-out (Ctrl+6,X)

Slash (up) (Ctrl+6,/)

Slash (down) (Ctrl+6,\)

Single dot (Ctrl+Alt+.)

Double dot (Ctrl+6,2)

Triple dot (Ctrl+6,3)

Quad dot (Ctrl+6,4)

Under single dot (Ctrl+6,!)

Under double dot (Ctrl+6,@)

Under triple dot (Ctrl+6,#)

Under quad dot (Ctrl+6,$)

220 MathType for Windows

Over-bar (Ctrl+_)

Tilde (Ctrl+6,~)

Arc (frown) (Ctrl+6,9)

Arc (smile) (Ctrl+6,0)

Hat (Ctrl+6,6)

Under bar (Ctrl+6,_)

Under tilde

Under arc (frown) (Ctrl+6,()

Under arc (smile) (Ctrl+6,))

Right arrow (Ctrl+Alt+-)

Left arrow (Ctrl+6,Left)

Double-headed arrow (Ctrl+6,Up)

Right harpoon (Ctrl+6,Alt+Right)

Left harpoon (Ctrl+6,Alt+Left)

Under right arrow (Ctrl+6,Shift+Right)

Under left arrow (Ctrl+6,Shift+Left)

Under double-headed arrow (Ctrl+6,Shift+Up)

Under right harpoon (Ctrl+6,Alt+Shift+Right)

Under left harpoon (Ctrl+6,Alt+Shift+Left)

8.5.7.5 Operator symbols

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

221 MathType for Windows

Plus-minus sign from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,=)

Minus-plus sign from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,+)

Multiplication sign from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,T)

Asterisk operator from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,*)

Division sign from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,/)

Circled plus from Symbol style

Circled times from Symbol style

Circled dot operator from Extra Math style

Dot operator from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,.)

Medium dot operator (free radical) from Extra Math style

Bullet from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,8)

Composition from Extra Math style

Left-pointing angle bracket from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,<)

Right-pointing angle bracket from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,>)

Left white square bracket from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,[)

Right white square bracket from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,])

8.5.7.6 Arrow symbols

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

222 MathType for Windows

Left right arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Alt+Left)

Rightwards arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Right)

Leftwards arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Left)

Up down arrow from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,Alt+Up)

Upwards arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Up)

Downwards arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Down)

Left right double arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Alt+Shift+Left)

Rightwards double arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+Right)

Leftwards double arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+Left)

Up down double arrow from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,Alt+Shift+Up)

Upwards double arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+Up)

Downwards double arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+Down)

Double arrow northeast southwest from Extra Math style

North east arrow from Extra Math style

South west arrow from Extra Math style

Double arrow northwest southeast from Extra Math style

South east arrow from Extra Math style

North west arrow from Extra Math style

Rightwards arrow over leftwards arrow from Extra Math style

Arrow rightwards over small arrow leftwards from Extra Math style

Small arrow rightwards over arrow leftwards from Extra Math style

Right harpoon over left harpoon from Extra Math style

223 MathType for Windows

Harpoon right over small harpoon left from Extra Math style

Small harpoon right over harpoon left from Extra Math style

Rightwards arrow from bar from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,Tab)

Downwards arrow with corner leftwards from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Enter)

8.5.7.7 Logical symbols

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Therefore from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,T)

Because or since from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,B)

Small contains as member from Symbol style

There exists from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,E)

For all from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,A)

Not sign from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,N)

Logical and from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,7)

Logical or from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,\)

8.5.7.8 Set theory symbols

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Element of from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,E)

Not an element of from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+E)

224 MathType for Windows

Union from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,U)

Intersection from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,X)

Union from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,Shift+U)

Intersection from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,Shift+X)

Subset of from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,C)

Superset of from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,S)

Subset of or equal to from Symbol style

Superset of or equal to from Symbol style

Not a subset of from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+C)

Empty set from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,O)

8.5.7.9 Miscellaneous symbols

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Partial differential from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,D)

Weierstrass elliptic symbol from Symbol style

Fraktur capital I from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+I)

Fraktur capital R from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+R)

Alef symbol from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,A)

Planck constant over two pi from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,H)

Latin small letter lambda with stroke from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,L)

Script small L from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,L)

225 MathType for Windows

Blackboard-bold capital R from Extra Math style (Ctrl+D,Shift+R)

Blackboard-bold capital Z from Extra Math style (Ctrl+D,Shift+Z)

Blackboard-bold capital C from Extra Math style (Ctrl+D,Shift+C)

Blackboard-bold capital Q from Extra Math style (Ctrl+D,Shift+Q)

Blackboard-bold capital N from Extra Math style (Ctrl+D,Shift+N)

Infinity from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,I)

Greek capital letter Omega from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,O)

Inverted ohm sign from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,Shift+O)

Dagger from Function style

Greek capital letter Delta from Symbol style

Gradient (nabla) from Symbol style

Diamond operator from Symbol style

N-ary summation from Symbol style

N-ary product from Symbol style

N-ary coproduct from Extra Math style

Integral from Symbol style

Degree sign from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,D)

Angle from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,Shift+A)

Measured angle from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,Alt+A)

Spherical angle from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,Alt+Shift+A)

Perpendicular from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,P)

Parallel to from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,|)

226 MathType for Windows

White up-pointing triangle from Extra Math style

White square from Extra Math style

White rectangle from Extra Math style

White parallelogram from Extra Math style

White circle from Extra Math style

8.5.7.10 Greek characters (lowercase)

Greek small letter alpha from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,A)

Greek small letter beta from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,B)

Greek small letter chi from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,C)

Greek small letter delta from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,D)

Greek small letter epsilon from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,E)

Greek phi symbol from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,F)

Greek small letter phi from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,J)

Greek small letter gamma from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,G)

Greek small letter eta from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,H)

Greek small letter iota from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,I)

Greek small letter kappa from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,K)

Greek small letter lamda from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,L)

Greek small letter mu from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,M)

Greek small letter nu from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,N)

227 MathType for Windows

Greek small letter omicron from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,O)

Greek small letter pi from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,P)

Greek pi symbol from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,V)

Greek small letter theta from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Q)

Greek theta symbol from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+J)

Greek small letter rho from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,R)

Greek small letter sigma from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,S)

Greek small letter final sigma from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+V)

Greek small letter tau from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,T)

Greek small letter upsilon from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,U)

Greek small letter omega from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,W)

Greek small letter xi from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,X)

Greek small letter psi from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Y)

Greek small letter zeta from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Z)

8.5.7.11 Greek characters (uppercase)

Greek capital letter Alpha from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+A)

Greek capital letter Beta from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+B)

Greek capital letter Chi from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+C)

Greek capital letter Delta from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+D)

Greek capital letter Epsilon from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+E)

228 MathType for Windows

Greek capital letter Phi from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+F)

Greek capital letter Gamma from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+G)

Greek capital letter Eta from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+H)

Greek capital letter Iota from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+I)

Greek capital letter Kappa from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+K)

Greek capital letter Lamda from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+L)

Greek capital letter Mu from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+M)

Greek capital letter Nu from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+N)

Greek capital letter Omicron from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+O)

Greek capital letter Pi from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+P)

Greek capital letter Theta from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+Q)

Greek capital letter Rho from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+R)

Greek capital letter Sigma from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+S)

Greek capital letter Tau from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+T)

Greek upsilon with hook symbol from U.C. Greek style

Greek capital letter Omega from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+W)

Greek capital letter Xi from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+X)

Greek capital letter Psi from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+Y)

Greek capital letter Zeta from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+Z)

8.5.8 Template Palettes

In This Chapter Template palettes(See 8.5.8.1) Fence templates(See 8.5.8.2)

229 MathType for Windows

Fraction and radical templates(See 8.5.8.3) Subscript and superscript templates(See 8.5.8.4) Summation templates(See 8.5.8.5) Integral templates(See 8.5.8.6) Underbar and overbar templates(See 8.5.8.7) Labeled arrow templates(See 8.5.8.8) Products and set theory templates(See 8.5.8.9) Matrix templates(See 8.5.8.10) Box templates(See 8.5.8.11)

8.5.8.1 Template palettes

Fence templates(See 8.5.8.2)

Fraction and radical templates(See 8.5.8.3)

Subscript and superscript templates(See 8.5.8.4)

Summation templates(See 8.5.8.5)

Integral templates(See 8.5.8.6)

Underbar and overbar templates(See 8.5.8.7)

Labeled arrow templates(See 8.5.8.8)

Products and set theory templates(See 8.5.8.9)

Matrix templates(See 8.5.8.10)

Box templates(See 8.5.8.11)

8.5.8.2 Fence templates

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

230 MathType for Windows

Parentheses, or round brackets (Ctrl+9)

Brackets, or square brackets (Ctrl+[)

Braces, or curly brackets (Ctrl+{)

Angle brackets (inner products, etc.) (Ctrl+,)

Single vertical bars (absolute value, determinant, etc.) (Ctrl+T,|)

Double vertical bars (norms)

Floor brackets

Ceiling brackets

Brackets denoting a type of interval

Bra-ket (-ket)

Bra-ket (bra)

Brackets denoting a type of interval

Open brackets

Left parenthesis

Right parenthesis

Left bracket (Ctrl+T,[)

Right bracket (Ctrl+T,])

Left brace (Ctrl+T,{)

Right brace (Ctrl+T,})

231 MathType for Windows

Left angle bracket (Ctrl+T,<)

Right angle bracket (Ctrl+T,>)

Left vertical bar

Right vertical bar

Left double bar

Right double bar

Left open bracket

Right open bracket

Bra-ket

Upper horizontal brace

Lower horizontal brace

Upper horizontal bracket

Lower horizontal bracket

8.5.8.3 Fraction and radical templates

Full-size fraction (Ctrl+F)

Reduced-size fraction (Ctrl+T,Shift+F)

Full-size diagonal fraction (Ctrl+/)

Reduced-size diagonal fraction (Ctrl+T,?)

Slash fraction (Ctrl+T,Alt+/)

Square root (Ctrl+R)

232 MathType for Windows

nth root (Ctrl+T,N)

Long division (Ctrl+T,D)

Long division with quotient (Ctrl+T,Shift+D)

8.5.8.4 Subscript and superscript templates

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Superscript (Ctrl+H)

Subscript (Ctrl+L)

Superscript and subscript (Ctrl+J)

Superscript to left of character

Subscript to left of character

Subscript and superscript to left of character

Over-script (Ctrl+T,Shift+L)

Under-script (limit) (Ctrl+T,Alt+L)

Over-script and under-script (Ctrl+T,L)

Large operator with superscript limit

Large operator with subscript limit

Large operator with superscript and subscript limits

Large operator with over-script limit (Ctrl+T,Shift+O)

Large operator with under-script limit (Ctrl+T,Alt+O)

Large operator with over-script and under-script limits (Ctrl+T,O)

233 MathType for Windows

8.5.8.5 Summation templates

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Summation with no limits (Ctrl+T,Shift+S)

Summation with underscript limit (Ctrl+T,Alt+S)

Summation with underscript and overscript limits (Ctrl+T,S)

Summation with subscript limit

Summation with subscript and superscript limits

8.5.8.6 Integral templates

Indefinite integral (no limits) (Ctrl+Shift+I,!)

Definite integral with overscript and underscript limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,S)

Definite integral with superscript and subscript limits (Ctrl+I)

Indefinite integral (no limits) (Ctrl+Shift+I,!)

Integral with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+S)

Integral with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+1)

Double integral with no limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,@)

Double integral with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,2)

Double integral with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+2)

Triple integral with no limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,#)

234 MathType for Windows

Triple integral with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,3)

Triple integral with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+3)

Contour integral with no limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,Shift+C)

Contour integral with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,C)

Contour integral with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+C)

Area integral with no limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,Shift+A)

Area integral with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,A)

Area integral with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+A)

Volume integral with no limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,Shift+V)

Volume integral with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,V)

Volume integral with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+V)

Integral with counter-clockwise loop without limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,Shift+Left)

Integral with counter-clockwise loop with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Left)

Integral with counter-clockwise loop with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+Left)

Integral with clockwise loop without limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,Shift+Right)

Integral with clockwise loop with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Right)

Integral with clockwise loop with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+Right)

8.5.8.7 Underbar and overbar templates

Tilde (Ctrl+^,~)

Hat (Ctrl+^,6)

235 MathType for Windows

Arc (Ctrl+^,9)

Joint status (Ctrl+^,J)

Over-bar (Ctrl+^,-)

Double over-bar (Ctrl+^,D)

Under-bar (Ctrl+^,_)

Double under-bar (Ctrl+^,Shift+D)

Right arrow over-bar (Ctrl+^,Right)

Left arrow over-bar (Ctrl+^,Left)

Right harpoon over-bar (Ctrl+^,Alt+Right)

Double-headed arrow over-bar (Ctrl+^,Up)

Right arrow under-bar (Ctrl+^,Shift+Right)

Left arrow under-bar (Ctrl+^,Shift+Left)

Right harpoon under-bar (Ctrl+^,Alt+Shift+Right)

Double-headed arrow under-bar (Ctrl+^,Shift+Up)

Mid-line strike-through (Ctrl+^,Alt+-)

Strike-through (Ctrl+^,X)

Strike-through (bottom-left to upper-right) (Ctrl+^,/)

Strike-through (top-left to bottom-right) (Ctrl+^,\)

8.5.8.8 Labeled arrow templates

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

236 MathType for Windows

Right arrow with upper text slot (Ctrl+T,Shift+Right)

Right arrow with lower text slot (Ctrl+T,Alt+Right)

Right arrow with upper and lower text slots (Ctrl+T,Right)

Left arrow with upper text slot (Ctrl+T,Shift+Left)

Left arrow with lower text slot (Ctrl+T,Alt+Left)

Left arrow with upper and lower text slots (Ctrl+T,Left)

Double-headed arrow with upper text slot (Ctrl+T,Shift+Up)

Double-headed arrow with lower text slot (Ctrl+T,Alt+Up)

Double-headed arrow arrow with upper and lower text slots (Ctrl+T,Up)

Double arrow with upper text slot

Double arrow with lower text slot

Double arrow with upper and lower text slots

Large over small arrow with upper text slot

Large over small arrow with lower text slot

Large over small arrow with upper and lower text slots

Small over large arrow with upper text slot

Small over large arrow with lower text slot

Small over large arrow with upper and lower text slots

Harpoons with upper text slot

Harpoons with lower text slot

Harpoons with upper and lower text slots

Large over small harpoon with upper text slot

237 MathType for Windows

Large over small harpoon with lower text slot

Large over small harpoon with upper and lower text slots

Small over large harpoon with upper text slot

Small over large harpoon with lower text slot

Small over large harpoon with upper and lower text slots

8.5.8.9 Products and set theory templates

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Product with no limits (Ctrl+T,Shift+P)

Product with underscript limit (Ctrl+T,Alt+P)

Product with underscript and overscript limits (Ctrl+T,P)

Product with subscript limit

Product with subscript and superscript limits

Coproduct with no limits (Ctrl+T,Shift+C)

Coproduct with underscript limit (Ctrl+T,Alt+C)

Coproduct with underscript and overscript limits (Ctrl+T,C)

Coproduct with subscript limit

Coproduct with subscript and superscript limits

Intersection with no limits (Ctrl+T,Shift+I)

Intersection with underscript limit (Ctrl+T,Alt+I)

Intersection with underscript and overscript limits (Ctrl+T,I)

238 MathType for Windows

Intersection with subscript limit

Intersection with subscript and superscript limits

Union with no limits (Ctrl+T,Shift+U)

Union with underscript limit (Ctrl+T,Alt+U)

Union with underscript and overscript limits (Ctrl+T,U)

Union with subscript limit

Union with subscript and superscript limits

8.5.8.10 Matrix templates

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

1 row, 2 column matrix

2 row, 1 column matrix

2 row, 2 column matrix (Ctrl+M,2)

1 row, 3 column matrix

3 row, 1 column matrix

3 row, 3 column matrix (Ctrl+M,3)

1 row, 4 column matrix

4 row, 1 column matrix

4 row, 4 column matrix (Ctrl+M,4)

Variable-size row matrix

239 MathType for Windows

Variable-size column matrix

Variable-size matrix or table (Ctrl+M,N)

8.5.8.11 Box templates

Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Box (top and left sides)

Box (top and right sides)

Box (bottom and left sides)

Box (bottom and right sides)

Box (Ctrl+Shift+T,X)

8.6 Toolbars

In This Chapter Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1) Navigating with the keyboard(See 8.6.2) Viewing and Positioning(See 8.6.3) Symbol Palettes(See 8.6.4) Template Palettes(See 8.6.5) Small Bar(See 8.6.6) Tabs(See 8.6.7) Large Tabbed Bar(See 8.6.8) Small Tabbed Bar(See 8.6.9)

240 MathType for Windows

8.6.1 Toolbar Overview

MathType's toolbar is used to enter symbols, templates, mathematical expression, and even entire equations into the equation you are working on.

See Also

Viewing and positioning the Toolbar(See 8.6.3) Navigating in the Toolbar using the keyboard(See 8.6.2) Symbol Palettes(See 8.6.4) Template Palettes(See 8.6.5) Small Bar(See 8.6.6) Tabs(See 8.6.7) Large Tabbed Bar(See 8.6.8) Small Tabbed Bar(See 8.6.9) Ruler(See 5.7.3) 8.6.2 Navigating with the keyboard

There are two methods for beginning keyboard access to the toolbar.

Navigating in a palette menu

Once a symbol or template palette menu is pulled down, you can use the arrow keys to move the focus(See 11.16) around in the menu. Once you have moved the focus to a symbol or template you want to insert into the equation, type Enter. To close the menu without inserting anything, type Esc (the Escape key) or click somewhere else with the mouse. You may have to type Esc more than once to set the focus back to the equation.

Setting the focus to one of the bars

There are several pre-defined keyboard shortcuts that will place the keyboard focus in each of the bars that make up the toolbar(See 8.6.1):

F2 or F5 Symbol Palettes(See 8.6.4) F6 Template Palettes(See 8.6.5)

241 MathType for Windows

F7 Small Bar(See 8.6.6) F8 Large Tabbed Bar(See 8.6.8) F9 Small Tabbed Bar(See 8.6.9)

Once the focus is on one of the bars, you can use the arrow keys to move the focus around in the desired direction. Besides the arrow keys, these keys are also used:

Enter (return): Type this key to insert a symbol, template, or expression into the equation once you have moved the focus over the one you want. You also use this key to open (pull down) a palette menu that is closed.

Esc (escape): Type this key to return the focus back to the equation or to close an open palette menu.

Other toolbar-related shortcuts

Using the Customize Keyboard command on the Preferences Menu(See 8.3.10), you can modify any of the keyboard shortcuts mentioned above. You can also assign shortcuts to display the various layers of the tabbed bars. See Customize Keyboard Dialog(See 8.4.2).

See Also

Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1) 8.6.3 Viewing and Positioning o Dock or float the toolbar Just double-click on the toolbar's drag handle, its title, or any empty part of the toolbar to toggle between docked and floating. You can also dock the toolbar by dragging it over the top or bottom of an equation window and releasing it (the drag outline will change to indicate you are over a docking position). You can prevent the toolbar from docking by holding down the Ctrl key while dragging. o Move the toolbar You can drag the floating toolbar as you would any window to move it. If the toolbar is docked, you can move it to the top or bottom of the window by dragging it. o Hide or show the toolbar The Toolbar command on the View Menu(See 8.3.3) toggles between hiding and showing the toolbar. If you can create all the equations you need from the keyboard, you might want to hide the toolbar to allow more screen space for equations. o Resize the toolbar If the toolbar's items are too small to see or it takes up too much space on your screen, you can use the Workspace Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.30) to choose between 3 different sizes. o Hide or show an individual bar There is a group of 5 commands on the View Menu(See 8.3.3), one for each bar in the toolbar, that you can use to toggle the display of individual bars. If you never use some of the bars, you might hide them to make the toolbar smaller.

242 MathType for Windows

8.6.4 Symbol Palettes

The Symbol Palettes consist of 10 pull-down menus. Each menu is filled with items that insert a single character or symbol(See 11.39) into your equation at the insertion point(See 11.23) . Although they look a little different, the palette menus work just like the Windows application menus you are already familiar with. The symbol description is displayed in the Status Bar(See 5.7.4) as the mouse passes over each palette menu item, along with any assigned keyboard shortcut.

See Also

Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1) Viewing and Positioning(See 8.6.3) Symbol Palettes(See 8.5.7.1) Adding symbols and templates from the palettes to the expression bars (See 5.1.5) 8.6.5 Template Palettes

The Template Palettes consist of pull-down menus. Each menu is filled with items that insert a template(See 11.40) into your equation at the insertion point(See 11.23). Although they look a little different, the palette menus work just like the application menus you are already familiar with. The template description is displayed in the status bar(See 5.7.4), along with any assigned keyboard shortcut as the mouse pointer passes over each palette menu item.

To enclose an expression in your equation by a template (e.g., a radical sign around its contents), simply select it before inserting the template.

See Also

Toolbar: Overview(See 8.6.1) Replacing one Template with Another(See 5.7.2) Expanding Integrals(See 11.13) Toolbar Viewing and Positioning(See 8.6.3) Template Palettes(See 8.5.8.1) Adding symbols and templates from the palettes to the expression bars (See 5.1.5) 8.6.6 Small Bar

The Small Bar is a place you can add often-used symbols, templates, and small expressions. Once you have added items to the bar, they can be inserted into your equations at any time by clicking on them.

See Also

Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1)

243 MathType for Windows

Editing the Status Bar description for Expression Bar Items(See 5.1.3) Editing Expressions in the Bars(See 5.1.2) Removing Items from the Bars(See 5.1.4) Viewing and Positioning(See 8.6.3) Adding symbols and templates from the palettes to the expression bars (See 5.1.5) 8.6.7 Tabs

The Tabs allow you to switch between 9 layers of expressions, symbols, and templates. To switch to a new layer, just click on the tab. You can also rename Tabs to organize your toolbar however you like. For quick access to each layer from the keyboard, you can assign a keyboard shortcut to a Tab. To rename a Tab or assign a shortcut, just double-click on it to bring up the Tab Properties Dialog(See 8.4.27). When dragging items to the toolbar, you can switch tabs by holding the mouse pointer over a tab while keeping the mouse button depressed; after a short while the toolbar will display the items associated with this tab. 8.6.8 Large Tabbed Bar

The Large Tabbed Bar is a place you can add often-used expressions. Once you have added an expression to the bar, it can be inserted into your equations at any time by just clicking on it. Use the Tabs(See 8.6.7) to access more expressions.

See Also

Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1) Adding Symbols and Templates from the Palettes to the Expression Bars(See 5.1.5) Editing the Status Bar Description for Expression Bar Items(See 5.1.3) Editing Expressions in the Bars(See 5.1.2) Adding a Keyboard Shortcut for an Expression(See 5.2.2) Removing Items from the Bars(See 5.1.4) Viewing and Positioning(See 8.6.3) 8.6.9 Small Tabbed Bar

The Small Tabbed Bar is a place you can add often-used symbols(See 11.39), templates(See 11.40), and small expressions. Once you have added an item to the bar, it can be inserted into your equations at any time by just clicking on it. Use the Tabs(See 8.6.7) to access more items.

See Also

Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1) Adding Symbols and Templates from the Palettes to the Expression Bars(See 5.1.5) Editing the Status Bar Description for Expression Bar Items(See 5.1.3)

244 MathType for Windows

Editing Expressions in the Bars(See 5.1.2) Adding a Keyboard Shortcut for an Expression(See 5.2.2) Removing Items from the Bars(See 5.1.4) Viewing and Positioning(See 8.6.3)

245 MathType for Windows

9. Getting More Help

In This Chapter Ways to Get Assistance While You Work(See 9.1) Getting help at the Design Science website(See 9.2) Technical Support(See 9.3) Giving us Feedback(See 9.4) 9.1 Ways to Get Assistance While You Work

 If you need help understanding how a specific dialog works, just click the Help button in that dialog to bring up MathType's online help.  If you need help understanding how a menu command works, click on the Index button in this window and find the menu name. Go to the page that describes the menu and find the section on that command. Alternatively, you can click on the Search tab to search for the command.  Visit the technical support page at the Design Science website. See Getting Help at the Design Science Website(See 9.2).  Contact our technical support department. See Technical Support(See 9.3). 9.2 Getting help at the Design Science website

We have many technical support notices on our website that can give you detailed solutions to common MathType problems. This is often the quickest way to solve your problem, since it is available 24 hours per day.

Just visit the Support page on the Design Science website.

See Also

MathType's end-user License Agreement(See 10.1) 10.3 Font License Agreement

License Grant

This Font Installer and the Fonts it installs ("Software") are products of Design Science, Inc., and protected under U.S. and international copyright law. By continuing this installation process, you are agreeing to abide by the restrictions described in this agreement.

The Software may be used solely to read, view, and print documents composed using Design Science's MathType product. You may not reverse assemble, reverse compile, or otherwise translate the Software. You may not modify the Software or create derived works from the Software. You are permitted to make copies of the Fonts to install into printers.

You may distribute unlimited copies of the Software to third parties, including copies for commercial distribution, as long as each copy is unmodified from the original. Such third parties are required to abide by this license agreement.

You are not permitted to distribute the Software with any implementation of the TeX typesetting system as defined by The TeX Book, by Donald Knuth. This restriction does not

249 MathType for Windows apply to software products that convert the TeX language to or from other languages or word processing document file formats. Limited Warranty

Design Science makes no warranties, including warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. There are no remedies under this warranty. Design Science is not responsible for any damages incurring from the use of the Software. Some states do not allow limitations on implied warranties, so some of the above limitations may not apply to you. 10.4 Multi-user and Site Licensing

MathType licenses are available at substantial savings over an equivalent number of individual copies for K-12 schools, universities/departments, industry and other types of organizations.

Contact Design Science for pricing and details:

 Email: [email protected]  +1 (800) 827-0685 (US and Canada; sales only)  +1 (562) 432-2920 (Outside US and Canada)  +1 (562) 432-2857 (Fax)

250 MathType for Windows

11. Glossary

In This Chapter Baseline(See 11.1) Blackboard bold (double-stroked)(See 11.2) Chapter/Section Breaks(See 11.3) Character Descriptions(See 11.4) Character Style(See 11.5) Clipboard(See 11.6) Current Equation(See 11.7) Default Web Browser(See 11.8) Display Equation(See 11.9) EGO (Edit Graphic Object)(See 11.10) EPS (Encapsulated PostScript)(See 11.11) Equation Preferences(See 11.12) Expanding Integrals(See 11.13) Factory Settings(See 11.14) Fences(See 11.15) Focus(See 11.16) Font(See 11.17) Font Encoding(See 11.18) Fraktur (Old German)(See 11.19) Function(See 11.20) GIF (Graphics Interchange Format)(See 11.21) Inline Equation(See 11.22) Insertion Point(See 11.23) Keyboard Shortcuts(See 11.24) LaTeX(See 11.25) Left-Numbered Display Equation(See 11.26) Math Axis(See 11.27) MathML(See 11.28) New Equation Preferences(See 11.29) Nudging(See 11.30) OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)(See 11.31) OMML (Office Math Markup Language)(See 11.32) Pile(See 11.33) Points(See 11.34) Relational Operator(See 11.35) Right-Numbered Display Equation(See 11.36) Slot(See 11.37) Styles(See 11.38)

251 MathType for Windows

Symbol(See 11.39) Template(See 11.40) TeX(See 11.41) TeX Language Input(See 11.42) Texvc(See 11.43) TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)(See 11.44) Typesizes(See 11.45) Unicode(See 11.46) Units(See 11.47) WMF (Windows Metafile)(See 11.48) The World Wide Web Consortium (W3C)(See 11.49) 11.1 Baseline

In typography, the baseline is the line upon which characters "sit". Characters with "descenders", such as p and y, normally have their descenders extending below the baseline. In many applications such as Microsoft Word, the baseline of a MathType equation is aligned with the baseline of surrounding text, as shown in red below. See also Inline Equation(See 11.22).

11.2 Blackboard bold (double-stroked)

Chapter/section breaks set the chapter and section number part of all equation numbers in the document up to the following chapter/section break. There are two ways to set each number: increment and explicit. An increment break causes the chapter or section number to be one greater than that of the previous part of the document; an explicit break gives the chapter or section number a specific value.

252 MathType for Windows 11.4 Character Descriptions

MathType stores textual character descriptions for most characters that are useful in mathematics. These descriptions are displayed in several places in MathType:

 In the Status Bar(See 5.7.4) as you pass the mouse pointer over symbols in the toolbar  In the Insert Symbol Dialog(See 8.4.13) for the currently selected character in the symbol grid  In the Customize Keyboard Dialog(See 8.4.2) for symbols that have keystroke shortcuts assigned to them 11.5 Character Style

MathType uses the term character style to refer to stylistic variations of a font, such as bold or italic. MathType supports only plain, italic, bold, and bold-italic styles. Underlines and overlines can be applied using the underbar template.

Be careful not to confuse this term with style(See 5.6.1). 11.6 Clipboard

A temporary holding place for information (pictures, text, etc.) to transfer between one place and another using the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands on the Edit menus(See 8.3.2) of most applications.

Copy places a copy of the selection on the clipboard. Cut works the same as Copy but also deletes the selection. Paste inserts a copy of the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point or replaces the current selection. 11.7 Current Equation

The current equation is the one you are editing in the top-most MathType window or, when working in one of MathType's dialogs, the equation in the window whose menu was used to display the dialog. 11.8 Default Web Browser

The default web browser is a user setting that determines which (if any) of the web browsers installed on your computer will be used when you try to access a World Wide Web address (http://...) on the Internet from any program other than a browser.

Refer to your browser's online help to find out how to make it the default web browser.

253 MathType for Windows 11.9 Display Equation

A display equation (also referred to as a paragraph equation) is an equation on a line by itself, usually centered within the line. See also Inline Equation(See 11.22). 11.10 EGO (Edit Graphic Object)

EGO is a Macintosh software technology that allows you to add objects (in the case of MathType Editor, equations) directly into a word processing document, or any other kind of document.

To add an equation to a document, choose the word processor's or other application's Insert Equation command, which is usually located in the Insert or Edit menu. 11.11 EPS (Encapsulated PostScript)

EPS is a file format used for graphics in desktop publishing applications like Adobe InDesign and QuarkXPress.

11.12 Equation Preferences

Equation preferences are the set of styles, sizes, and spacing rules applied to an equation.

11.13 Expanding Integrals

Normally, in professionally typeset mathematics, integral signs in equations are all the same size. Occasionally, however, you may want an integral to expand to the height of its contents.

To enter an expanding integral template(See 11.40) instead of the normal one, hold down the Shift key as you insert the integral from the template palettes(See 8.6.5).

254 MathType for Windows 11.14 Factory Settings

These are the settings for equation preferences, keyboard shortcuts, functions recognized, etc. for MathType as initially set by the software when it is installed for the first time, before you made any changes to them. See also the Preferences Menu(See 8.3.10), Equation Preferences(See 11.12), and New Equation Preferences(See 11.29). 11.15 Fences

Fence characters are symbols such as brackets [ ], parentheses ( ), braces { }, etc. that are used to enclose or "fence" other characters or symbols.

A fence template is a template that uses one or more of these fence characters. 11.16 Focus

Focus refers to the part of the window to which keystrokes will be sent. It is usually highlighted in some way. Examples:

 When a MathType equation has the focus, the insertion point blinks to indicate where characters will be entered that you type into the equation.  When a symbol or template in the palette menus has the focus, it is displayed with a raised outline around it to indicate that if you click on it or press Enter the symbol or template will be inserted into the equation. 11.17 Font

A font is a set of characters having a common stylistic look. MathType allows access to all fonts installed on your computer (except old-style bitmap and vector fonts). Use the Windows Control Panel's Fonts section to install and remove fonts.

Use the Insert Symbol Dialog(See 8.4.13) to review the available fonts on your computer and to explore the characters contained in each font. 11.18 Font Encoding

A font encoding is a correspondence between font(See 11.17) position (0 to 255 for most fonts) and the character in that position (also known as its glyph). A font encoding is also called a character set.

Many fonts can share the same encoding. For example, most Windows alphabetic fonts have the Windows ANSI encoding, and most Macintosh fonts have the Mac Roman encoding.

255 MathType for Windows

MathType has names for common font encodings. These can be seen in the encoding item in the Insert Symbol dialog(See 8.4.13). They are a key component of MathType's font knowledge system. 11.19 Fraktur (Old German)

This is a style of font often used in mathematics. MathType's Euclid Fraktur font contains the full Fraktur alphabet (e.g., A, I, a, b).

Functions are mathematical operators represented by multi-character names such as sin or cos, as opposed to single-character operators like + or –. MathType automatically recognizes standard function names as you type and gives them the Function style(See 5.6.1) . You can add or remove function names from the automatic recognition process using the Functions Recognized dialog(See 8.4.12). 11.21 GIF (Graphics Interchange Format)

See also Save As Dialog(See 8.4.24) and Web and GIF Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.29). 11.22 Inline Equation

An inline equation is an equation inserted in a line of text. Many word processors position inline equations so that the baseline of the surrounding text is aligned with the equation's baseline. See also display equation(See 11.9). 11.23 Insertion Point

The insertion point is a blinking line (or lines) indicating the place in the equation at which characters you type, or symbols and templates you insert, will go. Here's an example of what the insertion point looks like when it is at the end of the slot (and outside the slot) containing a summation:

256 MathType for Windows

Normal view:

Nested view:

11.24 Keyboard Shortcuts

A keyboard shortcut is a combination of one or more keystrokes, usually involving the Ctrl, Shift, Option, and/or Alt keys, that invokes a menu command or inserts a symbol or template. MathType has many built-in keyboard shortcuts but you can create your own using the Customize Keyboard command on the Preferences menu.

The keystrokes that define a keyboard shortcut are displayed in menus, the status bar, and dialogs using standard Windows abbreviations. For example, Ctrl+Shift+F1 means to hold down the Ctrl and Shift keys, then to press and release F1.

MathType allows you to define two-stroke shortcuts that consist of one stroke followed by another. For example, Ctrl+Shift+F1,A means to press the Ctrl, Shift, and F1 keys down as stated previously, then immediately followed by pressing the A key. 11.25 LaTeX

LaTeX is a dialect of the TeX(See 11.41) typesetting language.

11.26 Left-Numbered Display Equation

A display equation(See 11.9) that is preceded by a left-aligned equation number on the same line.

257 MathType for Windows 11.27 Math Axis

The math axis is an imaginary horizontal line to which certain math elements align, such as the bars in plus signs, the point of curly braces, fraction bars, etc.

For example:

11.28 MathML

MathML (Math Markup Language) is an implementation of XML created to describe math equations for integration into web pages. 11.29 New Equation Preferences

These are equation preferences(See 11.12) that are used for any equation you create from scratch by choosing New from the File menu(See 8.3.1) or using Insert Object(See 5.7.6) in an OLE(See 11.31)-compatible application. See also Factory Settings(See 11.14). 11.30 Nudging

Nudging is a way that you can make fine adjustments to the position of any equation elements. Just select the part of the equation you want to adjust, hold down the Ctrl key, and use the arrow keys to move in the desired direction.

You can remove all nudging from selected items using the Reset Nudge command on the Format menu(See 8.3.5). 11.31 OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)

OLE is a Microsoft software technology that allows you to add objects (in the case of MathType, equations) directly into a word processing document, or any other kind of document.

To add an equation to a document, choose the application's Insert Object command, and choose "MathType 6.0 Equation" from the list of object types.

258 MathType for Windows 11.32 OMML (Office Math Markup Language)

Office Math Markup Language (OMML) is an XML markup language for representing mathematics in Microsoft Word 2007 and Office 2010-2013. 11.33 Pile

A pile is a vertical stack of lines (or slots(See 11.37)). You can create a pile by simply typing Enter in a line (slot). You can use the Align commands in the Format menu(See 8.3.5) to change the horizontal alignment of the lines in a pile. 11.34 Points

Points are a standard unit of distance in printing, graphic design, and typesetting. There are 72.28 points in an inch. A point is .3515 mm. 11.35 Relational Operator

This is any character that MathType considers to be in the class of mathematical symbols that describe a relationship between the expression to the left of the symbol and the one to the right. Examples of relational operators are = (equals), < (less-than), and > (greater-than). MathType surrounds relational operators with a larger amount of space than other kinds of operator. 11.36 Right-Numbered Display Equation

A display equation(See 11.9) that is followed by a right-aligned equation number on the same line.

11.37 Slot

A slot is a place in the equation that holds symbols and templates. Each slot behaves much like a line of text in a word processor. Empty slots are displayed as a dotted rectangle.

259 MathType for Windows 11.38 Styles

A symbol is another name for a single character. Symbols are inserted into equations using the symbol palettes(See 8.6.4), Insert Symbol dialog(See 8.4.13) or simply typed from the keyboard. 11.40 Template

A template is a formatted arrangement of nested slots(See 11.37) and symbols(See 11.39). Templates are inserted into equations using the template palettes(See 8.6.5). 11.41 TeX

TeX is a typesetting language invented in the late 1970's by Donald Knuth, a Stanford University computer science professor. It uses markup such as

$x^2 + \alpha$ to represent equations. 11.42 TeX Language Input

Language Input is a feature in MathType that allows you to type a subset of TeX into the equation editing area. MathType will convert the TeX input to a MathType equation.

260 MathType for Windows

See Also

Using TeX Language Input(See 5.2.4) 11.43 Texvc

Texvc is a typesetting language based on TeX(See 11.41) that is used by Wikipedia and others. Since it's a basic subset of TeX, trying one of the Texvc translators is a good idea when targeting an application or website accepting TeX formulas. 11.44 TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)

In MathType, a typesize is simply a character size that you can refer to by name, rather than by numerical value. Each character you enter in an equation is automatically assigned one of five typesizes (Full, Subscript/Superscript, Sub- Subscript/Superscript, Symbol, and Sub- Symbol) depending on its position in the equation. You will usually not have to worry about which typesize is currently in effect; MathType "knows" when you are entering a subscript, for example, and assigns the Subscript typesize automatically. By changing the definition of a typesize, you can quickly change the size of all the characters that use it. 11.46 Unicode

Unicode is a character encoding standard that assigns a numerical value (from 0 to 65535 and above) to every known character used by the human written languages in use in the modern world. Although Unicode does contain many math characters, Design Science has assigned additional code points in Unicode's Private Use Area as allowed by the Unicode standard for additional characters used in mathematics. We use the term MTCode to mean Unicode plus our MathType extensions.

For more information on Unicode, see their website (http://www.unicode.org) or get the book version of the standard (The Unicode Standard, Version 5.0, 2006, Addison-Wesley Professional, ISBN 0-321-48091-0).

261 MathType for Windows 11.47 Units

You can enter dimensions such as spaces and sizes using any one of several units by choosing from the drop-down list directly to the right of where you enter the value of the dimension. MathType accepts the following units: o Points (pt) This is the most common unit and is MathType's default. There are approximately 72 points(See 11.34) in an inch. o Centimeters (cm) o Inches (in) o Picas (pi) There are approximately 6 picas in an inch. o Percentage of Full size (%) Use this unit to make a dimension vary in proportion to the Full typesize(See 11.45) as defined in the Define Sizes dialog(See 8.4.4). This allows you to change the overall size of your equations while maintaining the same spacing.

See Also

Define Sizes Dialog(See 8.4.4) Define Spacing Dialog(See 8.4.5) 11.48 WMF (Windows Metafile)

The W3C is the governing organization for the World Wide Web part of the Internet. They and their member organizations decide on standards for displaying and communicating information on the Web. Some of the important standards they administer are HTML and, for MathType users, MathML.

The W3C's website is at http://www.w3.org .

262